Build Your Shopify eCommerce Store Step By Step (0 coding) - Shopify Online Store 2. 0

1. Introduction: Hi there and welcome to this course. I want to start this course by saying, thank you, thank you for choosing me and thank you for choosing this course between all the other available courses here on Skillshare. The second thing I want to tell you is that this course was taught any updated in 2020 one. So all the lectures that you are going to see in this course are 100% in u, which means they wear the updated to meet the e-commerce market updates and the Shopify updates. So everything in here is up to date and everything in here is the dedicated to make you succeed. Now let's start by discussing what you are going to learn in this course. This course I'm going to show you how to create your store using Shopify. And I'm going to show you that step-by-step. This means that if you are a complete beginner and if you don't know anything about Shopify, this course is also perfect for you because I'm going to walk you step-by-step. In addition to show you how to create your story, I'm going to show you how to optimize your store and order to make it highly converting because creating any stored is not enough anymore in order to succeed, you should be creating a highly converting stored, a very well optimized store. And this is exactly what I'm going to show you in this course. So in this course, I'm going to walk you from the basics up to the most advanced techniques. And I'm going to show you that all step-by-step. So whether you are a complete beginner or if you already have some experience with Shopify, this course is perfect for you. Now before moving to the next lecture, I want to invite you to follow me here on Skillshare, because in this way you will get notified first when I publish a new course. Second, I want to invite you to follow me on Instagram, to subscribe to my YouTube channel, to add me as a friend on Facebook, on all of my social media profiles, I share valuable content. So don't forget to check me out and add me as a friend and to follow me. In addition to that, I want to invite you to check my website and then I list all the services I offer for my clients. You can go and check my services and see if any one of them is suitable for you in this case, please don't hesitate to reach out to me, whether on Instagram or on Facebook. Now, let's start with this course and let's move to the next lecture. 2. What Is Shopify and Why to Use It: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to discuss what is Shopify and why you should use it to create your store. Well, the first idea we should be discussing is what a Shopify. Shopify is a subscription-based online software that you can use to build your story. Which means that in order to use Shopify unit to pay a monthly fee. Now, why Shopify is, in my opinion, the best platform you can ever use? Well, there are so many reasons that make Shopify your best option to build an online store. However, in my opinion, the most important reason is how easy it is to use Shopify. You just need to sign up. This is it. You don't need any other complicated or something else. You just sign up and visit, you start using Shopify. Now, let me name more of the reasons of why. In my opinion, Shopify is the best platform to create your e-commerce store. Let's start with our first reason, and it is that Shopify hosts your website. I'm not sure if you are familiar with WordPress, but in the case of WordPress, for example, you need a third party host to host your website and Shopify. You don't need this. Everything is hosted on Shopify, So you just sign up and you start working. The second thing is Shopify gives you a clean and smooth dashboard to modify your store. And he had you have to know something. Shopify is a software that's meant to create stores. However, WordPress is a software that's meant to create any kind of websites. Which means that everything in Shopify is meant and organized in order to help store owners. However, this is not the case with WordPress because WordPress is meant for any kind of websites. Let's why, why you are using Shopify. You will notice that everything is in place in order to help you because Storify, dedicated for store owners like you. In addition to that, Shopify offers many fee and the paid adjustable teams to design your story. And all of the teams provided by Shopify on mobile friendly, which makes, which makes your work way easier forth, Let's Shopify, lets you add an infinite number of products and gives you an infinite data storage capacity. So you don't have any problem with your data capacity. In addition to that, also, shopify offers you sidestep and the product reports when you are running good e-commerce business, it's very important that you always keep monitoring your numbers. And Shopify gives you the ability to do the actual seeing shopify analytics dashboard. For swore, I recommend you to add Google Analytics to store. However, what Shopify offers is very good because phi gives you a lot of information related to store, for example, the conversion rate by returning customers that cause the orders, everything. So inside of Shopify analytics, you will find a lot of important numbers that will help you run your business and the best way possible. Also. So P5 offers a wide range of free and paid apps that make your store stand out. So for example, if you want to add something to the store and this feature that you want to add is not included inside of your store theme. You can always go and pick an app that does that. And there are many free and paid apps on the, on the Shopify App Store, and many of them are highly reviewed, so you can know that you are adding a good actual story. Also, shopify offers a very simple integration with Facebook and Google channels, which means just by a few clicks, you will be able to have a Shopify, a Facebook shop, and then Instagram shop, and the Google shop, just a few clicks. Nothing complicated because Shopify has a lot of direct integration with these platforms. And finally, Shopify is the quick to go platform, which means in just a few hours, you can create your own. And now, let's discuss what you are going to learn in this course and this course, I will walk you step-by-step through how to use your store to how to Shopify to build your story. Even if this is your first time working online, you will find everything you need to do in order to create an awesome story using Shopify. Just follow my instructions and everything would be very clear. Now discussing the Shopify pricing plans, as I told you before, there are different pricing plans and each plan is different depending on how big your store is and all of these details. We have the basic Shopify plan, which is $29 per month. The Shopify, this one which is $79 per month, and we have the Advanced Shopify, which is $299 per month. It depends on your business and you can check the different options of these pricing plans on the Shopify website. However, if you are just starting out and you are new to this, I guess the basic plan would be more than enough. And always remember that with Shopify, you get a 14 days free trial. So go to the description, click on the filing, get a 14 days free trial with Shopify and start building your store for free. And after the 14 days, you will start worrying about paying for Shopify. You have to know something that this trial, the 14 days to three trials come without even entering your credit card information. So you don't have, you don't need to worry about anything. So this is it for this lecture. I hope it gave you a good idea about why you should be using Shopify. And the next lecture I'm going to show you how to sign up to Shopify and helped start working with it. So stay tuned and meet me there. 3. How to Create a Shopify Account: Hi there and welcome to this lecture and this lecture I'm going to show you how to sign up to Shopify and how to get your 14 days free trial. So here I am on shopify.com and I just need to enter my e-mail in need and to click on Start free trial. I'm going to enter my e-mail and I'm going to click on Start free trial. I'm headed now to this page in here I should be having I should have my email in here. In here, I should enter my password. And in year two, I should enter my storming. If you already have a brand, either maybe on Etsy or maybe you have a brand on Instagram or maybe you have a retail and real life, it would be better to put your brand name in here. However, if you are just starting out and you are not 100% sure about your band name. I recommend you to put the closest possible to your brand name. So put something that's ready related to when you pick your brand name, this name will still make sense. This name is the one that should be five will use in your domain name, which means when we create the store, we would get this name dot shopify.com. However, through this course, I'm going to show you how to change a different Shopify name and replace it by a brand and domain name because this is better to look professional and to look like a true brand. So I'm going to put my store name. Let's say for example, I'm starting a store where I sell missing accessories. I'm going to call this stored notching and needles. Okay. The name is not taken, so I'm fine. I'm going to click here on Create your stuff. So now Shopify will be creating my store. It will take few seconds, and this is it. Okay, So here I am inside of 45 and now I can fill this form. I can skip it. Depends on you. I'm going to fill it already selling you reply. I'm I'm going to say that I'm just playing around now, Shopify will be recommending things to help me. If you want help with any of these things, you can, for example, pig or you can skip that. In here you put your current revenue and in here you put your industry. I'm going to pick other, for example, and I'm coming to click on Next. And now I need to put my address because this is something Shopify requires from store owners to get paid. I'm going to put my address in here and I'm going to click on Enter my store. And this is my store will be created. Few seconds and Shopify will take me to the Shopify dashboard. So as you can see, I'm inside of the Shopify dashboard in here at my store is created. Let me minimize this a little bit to show you how my URL looks like. So now my study ALL is knitting needles, but my shopify.com. That's why I told you to name this something close to the brand name of journeys. But if you have a brand name and by YouTube land Ni, by replant name for sure. So this is now my default URL, but I'm going to change that to look more professional. Now if I take this address and I go to another, another browser, let's say Firefox. I can see that my stored is password protected, which means that no one can see my store because they need to enter a password before being able to see it. This is not defaulting given by Shopify when you are just starting out with a trial plan, this is what you get as a beginning, but even in the future, if at some point you want to modify things in your store and you are not still running the store for you. I'm not receiving any traffic. You can protect your store by a password and then you go live with your story. So in here, I can enter my password if I have one, or this is how other people will be seeing the stored because it is password protected. And the next lecture I'm going to show you how you can remove this password so you store will be visible to anyone. So the set for this lecture, stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next one. 4. How to Remove Your Store Password: Hi there and welcome to this lecture as we have seen before it, after we create our stall using Shopify, I will start was left password protected. Now let's see how we can remove this password so we can get our store life. You go in yet your face to your Shopify dashboard. And under online store, you go to preferences. And under Preferences, you go to password production. In order to be able to remove the password protection, you should first select a Shopify plan. You will not be paying anything until their free trial ends, but you should be filling your credit card information in order to submit to a Shopify plan, to pick a Shopify plan. So either you click in here and you pick your plan. And in this case, when you pick your plan, you will be able to enable their password and you will be able to get your store live without any two entering any password. Or you can select a plan from here, and this is it. So you go to online store preferences, password protection, and you pick a plan and you enable that password. Let me click in here on pick a plan. And as you can see, these are the different Shopify plans. Let's say I'm going to choose this plan. I go in here and I pick either to pay each month or maybe every year and I save thirty-six dollars or maybe if every two years and I save this much, every three years and I save this much. I want to tell you something if you already have a brand and you are going to sell on Shopify, no matter what I recommend you to go with the biggest one because you will be saving money. Okay? And then here you either enter your credit card information or your PayPal information. And this is it after you select your option from here is a lecture options from here. And you will get your plan active and live. And remember, you will not be getting paid until that trial ends. So no need to worry. Okay? And when you, once you finish that, you can go back in here to preferences, password protection. And now this should be blue and you would be able to remove that password. So this is it for this lecture. I hope you enjoyed it. Stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture where I'm going to take you in a trip over the Shopify dashboard so you can get a little bit familiar with the software. 5. How to Add Currency and Time Zone: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. In this lecture I'm going to show you how to change the time zone and the currency for your story is actually very important because later on when you start receiving orders, you want to make sure that you have the right currency and time zone is very important for you to keep track of your orders and to make sure that you don't get things like mixed up or something like that. So in here in Shopify dashboard, you go to Settings. You go in here to general. In here you scroll down and you will see that these two options, and here you have to choose your time zone. You choose your unit mass system metric. What is, whether it is metric or not? And in here you choose your default weight unit if you are selling in us a, if you are located in your essay, you might need to change this, for example, to pound. If you are you selling in Europe, you can keep that as grams and kilograms and depends on where you are actually studying or what, what you are used to. So I'm used to metric and kilogram. I'm going to keep that. And in here I can change how my order number would be, so I can change the format of my order number. I'm not going to play around with that. In here. I can choose my stored currency and I can even change the formatting. And this is when I finish this, let's say for example, I'm picking a dollar, keeps going. So this is it. I click in here on Save, and I changed my time format, my time zone, and I changed my currency. So this is it for this lecture and the next lecture I'm going to introduce the Shopify dashboard for you. And I'm going to show you how to use it and how to proceed with creating your story. So stay tuned the VALS need at the next lecture. 6. Quick Intro to Shopify Dashboard: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture I'm going to show you that Shopify dashboard. And I'm going to make you a little bit familiar with this dashboard, especially if you have no experience with creating websites over all stores before, this might be a little bit challenging, although after this lecture everything would be extremely clear. So in here you have these different options. You have the home, the orders, the products that customers analytics, marketing, discounts and apps. Then you have your online store. So you'll homepage and here you will be seeing usually things related to your store like the live sessions, things like that. But for now, since we didn't start yet with the store, we see these options to add a plan at a product, customers that team at a domain, and so on. When you click here on orders, you see the orders you have received. So you see the orders in here and here you have the drafts, and in here you have the abundant checkouts. Those are people who reach the checkout phase by but didn't buy. So in here Shopify shows you who are the people who reached check-out free and their emails but didn't proceed. So this is actually very important because later in this course, I'm going to show you how you can reach out back to those people and convince them to buy from you in order to gain these lost sales. So after the orders, you have the products and he obviously you add your products. I'm going to show you how you can add your product. And here you have your inventories, and here you have your transfers. And in here you have your collections. And in here you have your gift cards. You don't need to worry about that because we are going to see most of these later in this course. Mainly if you are just starting out and things are not yet that complicated. You will have to add your products. You will have to manage it inventories to make sure that everything is on hand and you have a good idea about what products are still there and what products are out of stock. And you have to work on your collections and gift cards. It's not usually something all stores do, but something that also you might do. Okay. Here you have after products, you have the customers. Those are people who bought from you. And here you have the analytics and there is a lecture in this course where we are going to discuss this dashboard in here. Don't worry about that. You have the reports, the reports given by Shopify to show you your store results. Here you have that eye view which may lead to who, how many people are now on your store where they are located, things like that. And after analytics you have the marketing. Which means if you want to send abandoned checkout emails, there are there are amazed that you can send by default through Shopify. However, I don't recommend that later in this course, I'm going to show you how to deal with these lost sales. And in here you have, if you are creating campaigns inside of Shopify, you can see those, but I don't usually use Shopify and marketing are used a third party app to do that. And I'm going to show it to you at the end of this course. After marketing, you have discounts. So if you want to create a discount code, you do it in here. And in here you have the apps. As I told you before, Shopify has a Appstore that's full of free and paid ads. And many of them are very useful. And don't worry, also true this course we are going to see what apps you should be doing. What apps are important. But the most important idea that you have to keep in mind that you shouldn't be adding a lot of ads because absolutes really slow down your story. So you should be very cautious about how many apps you are adding and you should only add the most important apps to store. So don't rush out and start adding any actors thought this is not the right thing to do, you should only use the apps that you must use. Okay? And here, Shopify recommends some of the top apps, the most famous apps. You can go in here and check them out. After that, you go in here to online store. And this is actually where do you start with defining what defining the appearance of your story? First, you have the themes. I'm going to show you. There is a lecture about themes and this, of course, here you have your blog posts. If you are publishing blog post, here you do it. Here you have the pages because there are difference between a product page and a normal page. So also we are going to discuss that in this course. Here you have dynamic navigation, which are the menus also, this is a topic for one of the lectures. Here you have your domains. As I told you before, I recommend you choose a professional domain name. And here you do that. And here you have their preferences, which are things that you should be modifying and changing. And also we are going to discuss this. After finishing with this section, you go in here to settings. And here you have your restore settings. So you have the genital, the locations, the store or language, things like that. And you should be going over all of these settings and make sure that you are setting them up as per your conditions. I mean, each country's differential taxes will be different than mine you were at. For example, billing will be different than mine. Your payments would be different than mine. So you should be going all over these and you should be managing these and what was suitable for your case, for your location and for your brand. So this is it for this small dashboard and the coming lectures, we are going to discuss all of these and I'm going to show you how to modify all of these. So don't worry, stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 7. What Payments to Use?: Hi there and welcome to this lecture and this lecture we are going to talk about payments. And here there are two things that I need to talk about before starting this lecture. First, you have to know that your payments depend on your location, which means that what works for me might not be working for you. So you have to do your research and see what payments are available in your country and the peak. This is the first thing that you should be considering. The second thing that you should be considering is that you should be giving your customers at least two options to pay. At the same time. It shouldn't be giving them thousands of options. Usually two to three options to pay is enough, enough. And you have to give them the ability to do express, which means to pay directly. And I'm going to show you how to do that. So you're going here to settings and you go in here to payments. The first thing you have is that PayPal Express Checkout. And this is something I highly recommend to you is because people usually like PayPal and they have their bank account linked to PayPal. So it's easier for them to pay using PayPal and usually prepared as very trustworthy and people trusted. So I recommend you to activate your PayPal Express Checkout. You simply go in here, you click on Activate, you link it to a PayPal account. And this is it. I'm not going to do that because I'm not going to actually link my PayPal and here, but this is something you can do. After this, you will have different options. You will have a third party providers and the alternative payment methods, and you have the manual payment methods, okay? The first thing I need you to check is this 1 third party providers. And in here you can see multiple options and you need to pick the ones that work for you between these options. Maybe it's EPA, maybe it's to check out, maybe it's I count I'm not sure what works for you. So you have to go in here, do your research and see which one of these statements work for you. And there's also at Stripe for sure going here back and we in here that we have alternative payment methods. You click in here and you also can choose between these alternative methods. It's up to you if you don't have, if you didn't find anything here that CAN works for you, you can pick from the alternative payment methods in here, Okay? And in here you have the manual payment methods and they are payments that they are processed outside of your online store. For example, if you are a female payment on delivery, cash on delivery, you can be picking one of these. So as you can see, you have these options. And in here I need you to make sure that this is set up to automatically and the systems. Finally, the, I still want to talk about something. If you advocated in any of these countries, you will be able to Shopify payments. If you are not located, you will not be able to use any of these payments. The good thing about Shopify payments is that you pay less fees with them then you pay with third party providers. However, if you are not located on these places, you don't have any other option but to go with that third party providers and with PayPal. So this is it for this lecture, as I told you before, you need to do your research and you need to make sure that you are picking the payments that work in your country and that you can actually use The setup for this lecture. Stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 8. How to Set Up Your Shipping Information: Hi there and welcome to this lecture and this lecture I'm going to talk about shipping and delivery. But before moving to Shopify and starting to set this up, I need to tell you two things. First, shipping and delivery are very related to business, which means that everything I'm going to talk about in this video is general. I can go into details because you are shipping conditions, your rates are very related to where you are shipping from and to where you are shipping to. So you have to go back to your own shipping conditions and apply them inside of your Shopify. The second thing I want to talk about is that while selling online, you have to know that paying extra fees, which include paying, which includes paying for shipping, is one of the biggest objection people face while buying online. People don't like to borrow, to pay for shipping. They don't like to pay extra fees. So providing free shipping is always, always something that would increase your conversion rate even if you need to increase your product price in order to cover the shipping. But your customers don't like to pay extra fees in addition to your product price. So if it is very difficult to you to offer free shipping, I recommend you to offer free shipping with conditions. And in this course I'm going to show you and I have that will help you do that even more. But I recommended to offer free shipping with conditions. For example, you can offer three domestic shipping. You can offer free shipping for orders above $100 for certain countries and so on. However, the ultimate case, the perfect case, the case with that will get you the most of sales is to offer free shipping. But each business is different and each product is different. So at depends on your conditions, however, would keep this in mind that providing free shipping and free shipping conditions will most probably increase your conversion rate. So in order to access the shipping and delivery section on Shopify, you go to settings and you go to shipping and delivery. Okay. So so before I first decide the location, they're looking at delivery, the location where you are sitting, where you are actually located. And and provides several options like local pick pick up, like local delivery, and so on. Let's start with the shipping first, okay, Here we can manage shipping rates. Maybe you are doing worldwide shipping. If in case you are doing worldwide shipping, it means that you have to precise the shipping value for different countries, okay? For example, you might want to have the same shipping fees for all of Europe and the French shipping fee for USA or for Canada. So you have to precise that in here. Okay. So this is my location. I am shipping from here, let's say, and I'm shipping to the rest of the world. This was set up by default, brushes, Shopify, shopify by default gave this shipping rate. Now let's say for example, I have different shipping conditions for Europe. So I need to have a shipping zone. I need to create a shipping zone, which is Europe. I'm going in here and I'm calling it Europe. Then I'm going in here, and I'm going to also choose Europe. I'm not sure why it's not showing, but if you scroll in here, you will be able to see Europe. Just 1 second. This is Europe. Okay, So in this case I'm precising that I have a shipping zone which is Europe. And I'm going to precise the rates for Europe, which means each time someone from Europe buy a product from my stall, this rate will be applying, applied at the checkout phase, going to click on Done. And now here you have to add it. So either you add that it by yourself or you use your carrier or app to calculate the rate. Okay? If you go with your set up your own rates, you have to call the array, let's say it Europe. Then in here you have to precise the price, okay, but you might be saying, but what if my price is related to the package size and weight? You go and read and you click on add conditions. And your precise how your price will be will be specified based on the ultimate weight or based on the older price. So let's say it will be based on the order rate. So I will say that minimum weight is 10. Ten is too much 0.1. The maximum weight is one. And I'm going to say that the price for this shipping is for example, $10, okay? And I'm going to add this one. Okay, Now let's say I want to add a new condition. Let's say for example, for packages above one kilogram, I'm going to increase our price. I click in here also, I added it, I call it, for example, Europe too. I precise in here. But the conditions that this is applicable for atoms a fine 0.1 up to two, and I will right near $15. Okay, and so on. I add my rate same for the other shipping zone. I precise, mock precise my shipping zones and I precise that it's now let's say I want to add a rate that's calculated by the carrier or the app to calculate the rate, I click in here, and in here I choose my delivery. For example, I can show us UPS. It's a very good delivery. Delivery accompany. You can, for example, choose DHL. It depends on nu, Let's say I pick this one. In here, you precise the services. And as I said before, this is very related to what kind of contract you have with your shipping company. So you can precisely service you want. Let's say I want to prefer you UPS standard. If you want to know what is UPS standard, you go in here, you go to Google and you try to understand what are the UPS standards, shipping conditions, what are the services they are, they are they are offering so you can precise which one of these fits you better, okay? And you have to know that prices of these services are different. So for example, this service might be less expensive than the service and so on. Okay, If you scroll down in here, you can add this one to add the future services, a fuel if you wish. And in here, you also can add handling fees if you have had the late fees, if you want your customers to be paying handling fees, and you click on, Okay, so this is how you prove size you're shipping zones and your shipping rates. Okay? I recommend you an order to make things as simple as possible and if you want to other, It's manually. I recommend you to group people for example, you, this, for example, for this ten countries, I'm going to offer free shipping for these 10 countries. I'm going to offer $10 shipping and so on in order to make things easier for you. Now, going back to our our condition, our shipping and delivery in heat and Shopify. First you have local delivery, let's say you often local delivery, you have to manage in heat. Here you have local pick up also if you offer this option and here you can precise the package size, okay? So this is a normal default package size. And here you can add a package of gay, whether you are offering boxes, envelopes, software packages, you precise the size that way and you give it a name. Okay? And in here you precise the carrier packaging. If you have one and you click on Add package. Here, you can choose between those available. She can shift shipping and here you can check on your rates. As I told you before, that is DHL UPS, USPS. I love UPS. They are very good. They provide good process. You can use them if you wish, or you can use DHL. And also you can create your labels. For example, when you receive an order, you can directly pick, create a label on Shopify and added to the product to the order. And in here you have other options that also you can customize. So these are the shipping and and delivery conditions. As I said before, you have to keep in mind that they are very related to your business. And when you start setting up your business, you might be doing going as simple as selling products from your house. So you might not be, things might not be that complicated. However, these are things that you should be deciding on and implementing here on Shopify. So this is it for this lecture. I hope you liked it and I hope it will help you to add your shipping and delivery conditions state you're in with me and let's meet in the next lecture while we are also going to talk about very important things related to creating your own Shopify store. 9. How to Add a Branded Domain Name: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to talk about how to use a brand and domain name and how to add it to your Shopify store. It's very important to have a brand that domain name, because it's very important to have a store that looks professional. These small details like having a branded domain name, like having a business location, a business phone number, like having well-organized social media profiles, these small things, although they are small, but they give that impression that your brand is a trustworthy brand, that it's a professional brand. So I highly recommend you to go with all the things that will make her store professionally. And whenever you are hesitating whether you should be doing something or not, I always recommend you to go to big brands and your niche or other issues and see what they are doing and learn from them. So having a branded domain name, having a branded email address is a part of being and looking professional. So in order to add your domain name, either you choose to buy it from outside of Shopify from websites like 99 seal for example. Or you decide to buy it directly from Shopify. You go in here to online store, you go to domains. And in here you click on buy new domain. When you are starting an e-commerce store, it's very important why you are picking the name of your store. It's very important to make sure that the name you are choosing as available. You have to make sure that their domain name associated with your business name is available. Because if it's not available, it means that you can't name your website with your business name, which is something very bad because people will be going to Google and they will be typing you the brand name in order to find you. So imagine if your website has a different name than your brand name. So it's very important whenever you want to name your business, it's very important to make sure that the domain name of your business is available, and especially that that.com name is available. Okay. Let's say it this available and let's say you want to buy it. You click in here on binding domain. You write your domain name. Let's say it's knitting needles. And I'm going to see if it is available. It seems that the name is available and I can buy it. So I click in here, I buy a domain name and I associated with my store. When you buy a domain name directly from Shopify linking, it is very easy because you just have to follow the steps and it will be linked. I'm not going to buy the domain because I don't want to buy it. This is how you do it. You go in here, domains, you buy your domain name and you added. Now let's say for example, you don't want to buy a domain name, you want to add a new domain that you have. So you click in here on Connect existing domain. Let's say you are moving from another domain. You put your domain name and you click on Next, and you connect your domain with this Shopify account. Okay, so this is extremely important to look professional and it's extremely important for your business. Connecting your domain name to a Shopify depends on your original host because I'm not sure from where you have already bought your domain, but that depends on your original host. And the second lecture, I'm going to show you how you can buy your domain name Cielo, and how you can associated with your Shopify account. However, if you are using a different host names 0, you can follow the procedure. It's very easy and you connect your domain, your Shopify store. So this is it for this lecture and the next lecture, we are going to start seriously by reading your soul, by talking about collections, how to create them, how to add exam, and everything related to them. So stay John and less need there. 10. Setting up Your Domain Name and Get a Free Professional Email Address for Free: Hi there. And welcome to this video In this video, I'm going to show you how to add a Brandon domain name to your store. As I told you before, having a Brandon domain name will make your store look more professional And it will help you make your clients trust you more. As you see when you sign up to Shopify, you will get this link as your shop. If I store you, l you don't want to give that we want toe by a branded domain name toe by a branded domain name. I'm going to use our website called names alone. A casino is a very good website. It's ship and the most important thing it will not only get you a Brandon Doman name, it will also give you a professional email address for free. That's why we are going to use name zero. You will find the link on the scores description, please click on it and see name zero and sign up to an account. The first thing to do is to sign in or to send up. I'm going toe log in. I have already an account, so I have already so I have signed into name Cielo. Here you put the domain name you want to use. You have first to search. You might think about domain names that are already existing, so you have to toe try some names before finding an available one. Let's say I'm going to name my website. My knitting heaven? No, that that come name is not available. I always recommend you to use and they don't come extension. It's it's better. So I'm going to use to try a different name. Let's say my knitting of I don't know garden. So it's available that come is available and it's available for $6.99. It's perfect. You click on this in here and you register check out domains. So all the privacy settings here you choose privacy and this is it. I'm going to the least this one. I'm not going to buy it. Okay, so this is now my order. I want to buy this domain name and this is it to click on. Continue and you can buy your branded domain name. I'm going to copy this. Spend the domain name first. Then I'm going to click on continue. You endure because it card or your payment information and this is it. You add your payment information and you buy you bend the domain name. Now I'm going to show you how to add this branded domain name to your shop. If I store you go back to certify that sport in here you click on online stores, you scroll down, toe the maze, you click on it. Here you have two options. Either you choose to buy other my name from Shopify. What you choose to connect existing domain name domain names from Shopify are a bit expensive. That's why I use Nemsila toe by my domain names. So I'm going to click in here. I'm going to write my branded domain name and I'm going to click on next. So now you see this You have to change the name Sheila Settings Toe fits with these requirements. Don't worry. I'm going to show you how to do that. So you go toe Nemsila in Here you go toe domain manager. You click on your domain name you click on then a sicker than here. He's screwing down to find Shopify. This is it. This is Shopify and you click on, apply template and you click on Accept. And this is it. You go back to your ah Shopify store and you click on OK and you don't forget toe, keep the, um, direct all traffic toe. This domain name checked Shopify needs 84 hours a process to domain name. So you just have to wait until you domain name will become available in your start. Okay, when it's available, which is something like this. Now I'm going to show you how to get a branded in the address from Name zero. As I told you, it's a free branded email address. It's very professional, and it will look good on your store. So how to do that? You go back toe, manage my domains, you creek on your domain name, and you get back to this page. And here you click under email forwarding. You click on confident, okay, and you choose to add an email address. You can choose, for example, contact. Add to the store name. You want all the emails sent to this email to be four border to your email address or Gmail or whatever you re client will see this they will send their emails to this email, but that females will be in reality going to your email address. So just like forwarding emails from any mate another one. You're right here. Your email address, like this one, for example, blah, blah, blah, and you click on submit and this is it. Now we will have a branded email address. You will add it, and you can add a tour store. So now we have seen together how to add a brand, a domain name and how to get a brand of email address. I'm going to show you how we're to add your email address and the next video, and I'm going to show you how to start working with Shopify in Easy and Quick Way ST John and meet me in the next video. 11. How to Create and Manage Collections: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to talk about collections, how to organize them, how to create them, and many other things. The first thing that you should keep in mind while creating good collections and while organizing good products into collections. Collections are meant to help your customers navigate your store. So this means that because your collections should make sense to your customers and to help your customers to reach to what they are searching for. So for example, if you are setting candle's at perfume and face masks, for example, you should be organized in good collections in a way that makes customer journey easier on your store. Which means you should be putting their products, that they have the same purpose or that they are similar and the same collection. It's very important to organize your collections because if you have all your products everywhere without collections, you will make it very hard for your customers to actually enjoy the experience on your store. So always remember to organize your collections in a way that makes sense to your customers and in a way that makes your customers experience better and easier on your store. So to create collections, you just go in here to products. And under products, you go to collections. This collection is the homepage collection and by default here, don't touch it for now. Let's now go in here and click on Create Collections. And let's say for example, I am on my knitting and needles stored and I'm selling knitting yarns and knitting needles and eating accessories. So my first collection would be, for example, I would create a, create a collection for for, let's say your arms. Okay. But not only that, I'm going to make my collections even much more precise. Let's say I have a lot of yarns that they are made out of special kind of fabric. Or maybe let's say for example, I have a lot of red the arms. So I would be creating a collection. And I will be calling this collection with the name of this, this type of products. So let's say, as I said before, I have a lot of yarns that they are organic. So I'm going in here too tight it and I'm going to name my collection organic yawns. Aki. So this is my collection title. If you are optimizing good steward for SEO and if you are trying to rank higher on Google, you should be taking very good care at your title and description and every word you write inside of any of your pages. But there's another topic for another course. It's not the topic of this course. Let's say this is your collection title. Now in here, you are going to fund your collection description based on your theme. Some themes support text inside of a collection page. Others don't, but let's say you theme does. So in here you should be adding your collection description. And inside of this description you should be telling good customers why you haven't. Collection. What's, what are the products that they can find inside of this collection? So my collection is for organic yards. So for example, I can tell my customers that in this collection they can find yours and multiple colors. They are all organic. They are, for example, I can't talk about the different colors, the different projects that they can made out of these yarns and so on. Even inside of this description, you can link to other connections, you can link to other products and so on. But the most important thing is to add a description that's meant to help your customers. Always keep your customers in mind while you are doing anything or your story. Your biggest asset as your customers, your customers are your through fortune. So you have to treat them in a very good way. And you have to always keep in mind that you are here to provide value to them, to help them, and to make them love you and love your brand. So in here you write to description, I'm going to write anything, let's say check out. So I have written is very small description. But if you are, this is actually a store that I'm going to use. I would be writing a bigger description, much more organized one, I will be adding more information about the collection and so on. If you want to get inspired about what to write inside of your collections, I recommend you to go to big brands and new niche and to see what they are putting inside of your data collection pages. And to get inspired, always remember that big brands and big names, they always hire copywriters to help them out with writing the text. So it's always good to search for them and get inspired from them and learn from them to see what you should be including inside of your collection pages. So in here I have the title and the description. Now let's say I want to modify the stacks and commit to organize it. For example, let's say I want to change the text size in here, I can choose between these different styling. I recommended to keep the default style, which is paragraph. In here. You can make some words in bold, for example. In here you can make it italic, and in here you can underline. And here if you have several points, you can click in here to make them bullet points same for numbering. In here you can add out dent and indents. Let's say for example, I want to add an outlet and here I didn't, then in here I do like that. And here I put it back to its place. In here I can choose the alignment of the text always for big paragraphs. For big text, I recommend you to keep the left alignment because in this way, you make it easier for your customers to read your text. So don't choose the center aligned. Use the left-hand line that inhere can choose the color of your text. You can even choose a background color for the text. And if you want to add a link, Let's say for example, I want to link for where, especially on, in this collection, I go in here, I select the word and I click on the link in here. And I insert my link in here. I can choose between showing this link directly on this window or on a new window, which means when I click on this word in here, either I am taking, taken to a new window or I stay in the same window. And in you and your website opens. And here you can choose to add a table. Let's say I want to answer, insert a table, usually in collection pages without tables, but let's say in a product page and you want to insert a table, you click in here and you answered that table. And a few have already a table. You can change that, that say I have this table, for example, I can modify the size like that. And I can, for example, choose to add a row. I click in here and I click on Insert row above. I can choose column before, so on. So this is how you change your table. But as I said before, use and collection pages, you won't be adding any table. So let's remove this. Now let's say I want to add an image inside of a collection page. I click in here and I insert an image. I have first upload the file and I insect damage. If you have already products, you can add a product image from here, or you can choose to put the URL of the image and that will be uploaded in here. If you want to add a video, same thing you have, you have to add the embedded snippet, snippet box inside of here. If you are hosting good videos on YouTube, when you try to share a YouTube video, YouTube gives you the option to copy the embedded code if you are using remains the same. We may give, gives you the option to copy the embedded code. You put the code in here and the video will be showing in here. Okay? And in here, you can choose to clear formatting and go back to the normal formatting. Okay, After you finish all of that, you finish writing your collection page. You go in here, collection description, you go in here and you choose your collection type. You can choose between manually creating the collection. And you can choose between creating automatic collection. When you choose manual collections with it means that you have to add your products manually to the collection. Okay. When you choose automated collection, you mean it means that you are using some kind of a rule to add the product, your collection. I like to create automated collections because are easier and they save me a lot of time. Okay, I can choose any heat, for example, my condition to be, I can't choose any condition on all conditions. If I pick on all conditions, it means that for a product to be added to this collection, it should verify all the conditions listed here. If I put any condition, it means that it's enough that a product only verify one of these conditions to be listed in this collection. So in here you can choose between choosing the product title that can contains, for example, yarn. So in this case, I'm saying that if a product title has the word yarn on it. It should be added to this collection. I can, for example, choose u to be equal to exactly. But this doesn't work in the case of a title because you wouldn't name autofill products, yarns. It can be starts with, ends with does not contain, and so on. Now, let me add a different condition. Let's say for example, I want to have a product type. It should be equal to a. This works when you have different product types and you have already entered your product types. Inside of your product. The products you go. And here you can also choose products price. For example, let's say we are creating a collection for products below $100. We can say for example, here, at any product that has a price lower than, for example, $100. In this case, each product that has a price less than $100 will be added to this collection. So you can see you can create multiple ways, multiple collections with a lot of conditions. The most important thing is, as I said before, to keep your customers and mind while creating these collections. Okay, after you finished with the conditions and here you go in heat and you edit your website, SEO, title and Meta description. As I said before, this is a whole topic, but if you are doing SEO, it's where you place your page title, your description, and in here you add, add. Let's say for example, you're changing, you're changing direction of your collections, which is something I don't recommend. But let's say for example, I'm changing this. I can add, for example, like for example, red, let's say so, something like that. So now I have a different URL then that octet. But if you want my opinion, have the title as you want it to be, include the same title in here and occluded and here, you have to know that this one in here is the title that shows on Google. So it can be bigger than this one. Okay. Because it's the one that shows in Google when you search for something, It's not the same as this one. Okay, So you enter this, you click on Save and even at the future and the future, if you go in here and you change, they are L Shopify will be redirecting directly from the audience, from the object L to the new URL. Okay? In here you can choose to clarify, clarify why where this collection is available. Maybe it's available on your online store only, maybe it's available on your Instagram shop, maybe on your Facebook shop and so on. You select from here, he had to select a collection image. Also depends on your on your seam. Something supports images, collection images on the collection page. In this case, you have to add an image. If your theme doesn't support a collection image, you can skip this part, but I highly recommend you to add an image in here and to modify the text of this image in order to optimize collection page for SEO, I'm going to click here on Add Image and I'm going to show you quickly how you change the alt text. Let's say for example, this is my collection image. I go in here, I click here, and I change the alt text. Okay, So this I'll, text should be, should contain the keywords I'm working on. And to be describing this image, after you finished everything in here, you click on Save, and now you'd collection is created if you have chosen the automatic rules, your products would be directly added to this collection and you won't have any problem. Okay, Now going back to our collection, now in here you can see my first collection and you can see the product conditions. You can create as much collections as you want, but also one more time, create the collections that can help your customers. In here you can choose to select, for example, this and do bulk editing like if you want to make collection available, collections available at the same time, or maybe delete collections or maybe added collections. You can do that in here. I'm going back in here. Here you can filter the results by the availability. And here you can filter by type and you can sort it by alphabet and so on. Or you can even go in here and search for your collections. So this is it for collections. Collections are very important for your store performance and for your customers experience. This is it for this lecture. I hope it will help you to create awesome collections and to always keep in mind that your main purpose is to make your customers happy and satisfied. State on with me and let's meet in the next lecture where I'm going to show you how to start adding your products to store. So stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 12. How to Add Products to Your Store: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture I'm going to show you how we can start adding your products to store. And I'm going to add a product produced so you can see all the available options and you can see how you can do this and the best way possible. So going back to our Shopify dashboard, we go in here to products, and you go to all products and we click in here on Add a product. Okay, So we are adding our products in here. The first thing that you should be filling is your product title. Your product by title should describe what your product is about at the few, if any brand you name your products like each product has a different name, you should be putting your product name in here as well as some details about the product, but keep it short and keep it straight. Let's say for example, and here is our product I'm adding is red organic yards. I'm going to click in here, red lights in here. That organic cotton yarn for example. So this is my product title. Once someone read this title, can easily know what I'm saying in this space, what this product is about. After your product title, you should be writing your product description. If you are optimizing your store for SEO, you should be taking a lot of time into writing big descriptions. But even if you are not doing that, even if you are not optimizing for SEO, stellar descriptions are very important and it's estimated that adding a good description can increase your conversion rates, which means the number of sales by 70 percent. So it's not something that you can play around. You have to write good product descriptions and I highly recommend you to take that time and to rising. This description is not the same as with the collection page in here. You can actually write the descriptions and people are used to have big descriptions inside of product pages. However, while writing this description, take good care of formatting, which means use boiled, use bullet points she was numbering anything to make your description easier to be read. Okay. So you add your description in here and you modify it. I'm going to write anything and I'm going to show you how to modify it. So okay, So I DO this one description for this product for food, if you are a product that you are adding just told you for me, taking much more time and to writing the description, you should be going to big brands in your niche. Search for their descriptions, see what they are saying. Get inspired, include everything you found that inside of this description. So you go in here, I'm going to organize this a little bit. So for example, I started my description with a question. I'm going to make it bold and ongoing, for example, here toward but the fact that it is 100% organic, I'm going to show you something in here. I mentioned that this yarn has different colors, although in this product I'm only including one color, which is that at this is a red organic cotton yarn. But why I did that? Because in here I can simply. Select, and I can link my black organic cotton yarn in here product because what if someone landed on this page and she wants, for example, to buy the black yarn, It's very nice to link to the blackboard and here also to the white 11. Let's say for example, an additional offering yarns. I'm also offering patterns and I'm selling patterns are going here and I'm link two of my patterns, patterns that I have did using the same yarn. This is what we call it interlinking. When you mentioned other products or other pages inside of your description. And this is something very good because it increases your a pageview and people start going from a page to another on your store. So as I said before it, if this is an actual product that I think to my store, I would be taking much more time into writing the description and into including everything that I should be including inside of this description. Each niche is different. So if you are running a store where you sell iPhone covers, you will be talking in a different way than if you are running a store where you sell water bottles. That's why when you pick, when you know your niche, when you know it very well, you should do your research. See how to talk with your target audience, what you should be including inside of your description and what your target audience interested about. If I am editor, I would I be interested in the length of the arm, maybe on the feeling on their own, maybe on the colored degree, and so on. So you have to do your research, you have to know your market, you have to know your customers, and you have to write a description that includes everything you audience wants and needs. So this is it for the description editor, and he works in the same way as the collection page. After you finished in here, here you add your product images. Okay. I recommended to have several photos for the same product because when people are shopping online, they are not being actually, they are not actually able to see the product. It's not like stopping and real life. So what are they miss the most is the ability to actually feel the product and to make sure that the quality is good, definition is good, all of these details. So giving, providing images will make your users experience that battle because your customers will be able to see the products from different angles. They will be able to judge the products. They will be able to see the details that they will be able to understand when, what this product is about and how it works and so on. And also by providing a lot of details, You make it easier for you because you will get less the questions from your customers and you will get lower refunds and numbers and returns numbers because your customers made much more informed decisions. So include a lot of photos for your products. The more complicated your product is, the more information you should providing and the more details you should be providing. Keep that in mind. Also including lifestyle photos is very good because they give a different feeling about their product and they show the product in real life. So in here you include your photos and as the same, the same thing that we did for your collection images in here also, you should be adding the alt text of your images and order to include keywords related to what you are setting. So I gathered some random images from the Internet from Pixabay and I'm going to add them as if they are my product images. I'm going to click in here on Add Files. And I'm going to add these images. So these are random images, okay, Remember that? So I'm adding them in here. It's better if you name the images files by something that makes sense. So it can be, for example, cotton yarn, that cotton yarn and so on. After you add them in here, the first one in here, the image you put in here is the one that we'll be showing on your store, the first one. So it's better to have your direct product shot in here. Let's say for example, I'm going to put this one. And in here I can click and I can add text in here you should be including irrelevant keywords, something related to the image at your product, okay? And you can add as much as you want images into future if you wish, and so on. If you click in here, you can, for example, read this image or delete multiple images at the same time. After you add your images in here, you go down in here and you put a pricing. So here you have the item price. If this item is on sale, you put the price and the compared to price. If it's not on sale, you simply put the price, let's say it's $10, Okay? And in here, you put your costs if you wish. This is what helps you to deal with financial, financial side. If you wish, you can put it and you can click on charge taxes on this product here and here you can manage your inventory. So you put your stock keeping unit in here and your barcode and use abuse, so on. Okay, Here you can choose between letting Shopify Treg the quantities, or between selling even when you are out of stock. So you can decide, for example, to sell this item even if it's out of stock and you tell your customers that it's out of stock and it needs some days, two more days to arrive. You can do that. And in here you add quantities that they are available and the weight of the product for the shipping, you add some other information in here, and in here you add a variance. This would be another topic for another lecture. But in here you change the variance. So if you have a product with three colors, for example, you can be doing that in here. In hero change that SEO information about your product, the page title, the description, and the URL. So once you've finished with everything in here, you go to this bar in here. In here, you can choose a product type. If you didn't enter any product type before, you can start adding your product types. And in here you change the vendor if you want. And in here, you can add this product manually to a collection if you wish. Or you can add a tag for this product so you can add it manually to a collection. So for example in here you can address and you can create a collection that combines all that adds yarns on it. So for example, you create a collection with a condition where every yarn with that attack will be included inside of this collection. So thanks, can help you to create collections. You can do that from here. And this is it in here. You can choose whether to activate a product or to keep it as a draft. And in here you can choose your sales channel, whether you want to sell this product on Shopify only or maybe on Instagram or maybe on Facebook and so on. And you click on safe. And this is a, so this is how you create your products. And the next lecture, I'm going to show you the variance and help set them up. So stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 13. How to Add and Manage Product Variants: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to talk about variance and how to add them to your product. So here I am again inside of my product page. I scroll down in here two variants and I click in here. Variance means different options of the same product. For example, if you are offering the same product and multiple colors or sizes or so on, you should be adding this inside of variance. So I'm going in here to choose, for example, colors. You can choose between all of these type of variance. I'm going to pick color and I'm going to write in here, for example, red, yellow, pink. Okay, so I'm adding my colors. Great. I'll go in here and I save this. After saving, I go back to the variance in here, I click on the variant and here I changed everything about the variant. So for example, I can add an image for the variance. So once someone is choosing this variant, he would be showing, seeing the image associated. And I could change the price, the details in here that shipping and so on. And I can do the same for all of my values. And this is how you modify variants. You can add multiple variants, not only the color, so you can have colors, sizes, and so on. So this is a tort of this lecture. I know it's a very small lecture, but providing variance is actually something many people are interested about. Some brands prefer if they have, for example, multiple colors and they prefer to have one product image, one product page for each of the colors. So for example, in the case of this yarn may prefer to have read your product and yellow yarn a product, a product, other brands prefer to keep all the ions. For example, if this is the same ground and multiple colors, they prefer to have all the ions inside of one product page and offer variance depending on the color. So depends on how you are running your business. I prefer to have all the colors and inside of one product with what offering variance. Unless you are optimizing for SEO and you are targeting for color based keywords. In this case, it would be a totally different subject. So this is it for this lecture. I hope it will help you to create variants for your products. Stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture where we are going to talk a little bit more about how to assign products to collections. And I'm going to make this super clear for you in case something is left on clear until now. So stay tuned and let's meet in the next lecture. 14. How to Choose Your Store Theme: Hi there and welcome to this lecture and this lecture I'm going to show you how to choose your store theme and what to look at and the theme you are picking out. So the first thing I want to say that with all the themes available on the Shopify Theme Store and also the themes available on third party websites like Inventor market and so on. It seems a little bit difficult to decide which theme to go with. That's why I don't want you to linger too much on this decision. I wanted to make it way easier for you to make this decision. So in this lecture, I'm going to point out the most important things that you should be looking at when you are browsing between themes and picking your theme. And in the next lecture I'm going to walk you through how to explore themes on the Shopify Theme Store and how to pick the theme that might be the best for you. So let's start with this lecture. The first thing you should be looking at when you are choosing your theme is to make sure that the theme you are using is responsible at mobile friendly, this is actually very important because mobile users make up to 50 percent of your total users. That's why it's very important to make sure that your store looks great on all devices. And this includes mobile, tablet and desktop. That's why whenever you want to go with the theme, take the demonstrator and tried to check it out on, on your mobile app, make sure that it is, it looks good. Or you can always check other stores who are using your same theme and see how their stores look on mobiles. And under next lecture, I'm going to show you how to find out the stores who are using certain themes and so on. Now moving to the, to this fact, as I told you before, if 50% of all online sessions are coming from smartphone devices and this happened in 2020. So you can't ignore the importance of mobile version. Many store owners, many e-commerce stores owners focus mainly on how their stores looks on PCs and laptops. And they totally ignored the mobile where in reality mobile version, the mobile version at the most important one. So moving now to the second, you should be taking good care of it is to make sure that the theme you are using loads fast on desktop and mobile. And this is something very important because people hate to wait. So when they land on your store, they don't want to wait more than two or three seconds to see the page loading. If you waited a few loading time is very big. People will be bouncing out and they would be leaving. Think about people who are at a restaurant and there is a huge queue in front of them. Money people will not be waiting in the queue and they will leave. And this is exactly what happens on your store. So you have to make sure that you install loads very fast. And the theme you are choosing has a great influence on your store speed. That's why this is something that you should be taking good care of. Now to you to understand how much the thing we are picking is good. Either you go to websites who are using your same theme and you check out their speed on Google PageSpeed or being pink down or on geometrics. Take that they must store it and also you check the speed on these devices. It's always important to pick a theme that already loads fast because in this way you make sure that at least your theme will not be the thing that's slowing your store. Now after that, the third you should be focusing on is to make sure that the theme you are using has at least a recently viewed section or related products section. While having these two sections or one of them is very essential for your store conversion rate, for interlinking and for many, many things. That's why every store now has a related product section or a recently viewed section. It's way better if you are ready. You are already using a theme that offers these two options. So you don't need to use apps to add the options because adding too much apps will slow down your websites. So our aim is to avoid using apps as much as possible. Let's worry, it's better to make sure that the team you are picking has at least recently viewed section, all product or related products sections. Now moment that point on before and it is to make sure that the theme you are using looks than it is to what you are aiming for. And this is actually very, very, very important, okay? So each one of us, while creating the store, has an idea about how he wants or she wants the store to look like. So think about what you ought you want to have in your store and search for that theme that looks the most like what you are aiming for. I highly recommend you to check out your competitors, see what they are offering, how their stores look like, see how the feeling is that what are the things that they are offering and they tried to find something that is familiar to what they are doing, but at the same time tried to stand out. So while picking your theme, you have to search for something that looks the most like what you want. Because, because this way you will make it easier for yourself to customize the theme and to reach the goal you want. And remember, we don't want to use a lot apps. So when you pick a theme that looks the most like what you want, you will be avoiding adding a lot of apps to adjust the team. So these were the main points in my opinion, you should be focusing on. However, here I have to say something very important. Picking a good theme for your store will change totally the user experience on your store, especially when it comes to navigation, to how the pages load and everything else. However, if you are on a budget and fewer, if you don't have money, you can go with a free themes at a start and then you can move to a more professional theme, okay? The most important thing is even if you are using a free theme, is to always keep that professional and look branded look branding is more important than paid theme. However, pay theme has had a lot of good points and good things that they can add to your store to make it better, to make it convert better, and to make it low trusted and so on. So this is a term for this lecture and the next lecture, I'm going to show you how to explore the Shopify Theme Store and how you can find that if you are looking for. So this sit for this lecture, stay tuned and let's meet in the next lecture. 15. How to Backup Your Theme and Work Offline: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to talk a little bit about how to back up your theme. So I know that most of you are just starting out so you don't need to backup your theme. But let's say you've already installed the theme when you store it and worked a little bit about on it. So how we are going to back up your theme. So either you duplicate the theme and here you go to action. You'd replicate that theme and you work on the offline version or you download the theme files, you keep it on your PC and then you will have a backup plan. I usually do both. I downloaded the files and I duplicated themes and this way I would have two options. So after, after downloading your theme file, you can, whenever you want to restore your backup, go in here and upload the theme from here. So let's say, for example, this is my current team and I want to change it. What I can do is I can go in here Actions. I can go to duplicate. And now I'm creating a copy of my theme. So let's say you paid for ethene and this team now is offering an update, okay, so you can replicate your existing, existing theme and you can update the offline version. In this way, you will have time to manage the new update and to manage your storefront. So I am replicating this div. It's taking a little bit of time. So as you can see now I have my beauty theme, which is the live one. And now I have a copy. I can go in here and I can choose to rename it. Let me rename it for example, backup theme. I'm usually not that cautious with Shopify themes because I've never had a big problem with restoring any theme or with an ID of having a backup. But if you have some experience with WordPress, you would know that some websites sometimes crush. So we do in order to keep yourself safe, it's always better to keep a backup for the store. So now as you can see, it's taking a little bit of time because everything is happening at the same time. So this is my life theme and this is my offline theme. What I can do now I can go in here action and I can change inside of this theme instead of changing my life theme. So if I have a life theme that's working, I can change the backup or changed a copy. Then when I finished, I can publish it from here. Okay. I'm not going to do that because I don't have a theme already. I'm just starting from 0, but I'm showing, showing you that in case you are already in here and you already have restored and you don't want to mess. You live with your stored live while customers are visiting it. So this is it for this lecture and the next lecture we are going to start with a serious word. We are going to start with customizing your theme. So stay tuned and let's meet in the next lecture. 16. How to Change Your Theme Fonts and Colors: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture, I'm going to show you how to start customizing your theme. And the first thing we are going to customize as your fonts, and later on we will be customizing the colors, everything else. Let me start from here. So I have added this team to my store. It's definitely we have big together. Here I have several actions, whether to preview, whether to rename, whether to replicate, whether to download the theme editor code or other languages. Well, concerning editing that God, this is something that you don't usually mess with unless you are doing something that you know about. So if you add a little bit familiar with the code, or if you need to want to need something that's related to Google Analytics autoclave you or something like that. It's okay to play around but don't mess with that unless you know what you are doing. Okay, and you can click on Customize to go to the editor section. Okay, let me start by previewing the theme. So you can see how my store now looks like. So now my store looks like that because I didn't actually done anything. This is the default theme as it was installed. So I'm going to close the preview and I'm going to start working on it. Okay, so I'm going to close the preview and I'm going back to my Shopify dashboard. Back to my online store, back to themes. Okay, back in heat. So this is a preview here. I have these other options but I'm not going to pick them. I'm going to start customizing the theme. So this is the theme editor and I'm going to explain to you a little bit how this works. So here you can know where you are working. So you are working on the homepage. You can choose to work on their password page, on the product page of the collection page, on the collection list, or on the blog, or on their card, or on the 404 page. So here you know what page you are customizing, okay, So this is the first thing you should know. Here you can undo and redo. Here you can exit. And here you can choose whether you are seeing the mobile version, the desktop version, or the full, full screen. So here I'm seeing them over. Here, I'm seeing that desktop, okay, and I know that I'm changing the live version. Okay, So this is the dashboard from here. From here I have my section That's actions that they are available inside of my homepage. Okay, So those sections are in here. Okay. And in here I have the header and the footer under her. I have the sections in between. So this is the header. These are all my sections and this is the footer, so Hadar sections, footer. Okay, this is something very important. Here I have my theme settings. If I click in here, I go, I go to this page where I have my different settings. Let me go back for a moment here I have the actions, whether I want to edit the code languages, view or view document documentations, okay, some themes offer documentations to help you customize the theme and we make it better. So if this is your case, always check that documentation's wherever you want to add something that's not added by default. Theme. Okay, So getting back to theme settings in here, I can change the colors. I can change the typography, I can change. I can do things with the surge, the social media, the phosphagen, the Add to Cart notification, that checkout, and the theme style. Okay, let me go first to the theme style. Here I can choose between default and between light. Something's offered different teams dies. This one doesn't offer something that the front. If I go in here two colors, I can see the colors that I can't be modifying. If I go in here too. Pornography, I can see how to change the typography and so on. In this lecture, I'm going to start by changing the topography of your, of your store. Actually, each brand should have a set of colors and should have some fonts. So if you are trying to look like a professional brand, you should sit down, take your time deciding what colors you should be using for your brand. You should, you need to pick a some accent color which has some strong color, some light color at the same time in order to have like a palette of colors that you can work with. So it's a very important, too precise your brand colors. And it's very important that you decide them based on your niche. So do a little bit of research, check out what are the best colors. For example, you should be using for an accessory store, or for a pet store, or for a cell phone store. So check out, do your research, pick your colors depending on that same folder. Fonts don't go with the phones that come by default with a theme because believe me, when you change the font, you would whole stored feeling will be totally different. So in here I can change the font, the font for the heading and the buttons. And this is the font of the body texts by heading and buttons. This is the heading and buttons. And this is the body text. Okay, so let me go in here. This is the default one which is the Helvetica bold. I don't have anything against the Helvetica bold. However, I prefer always to work a little bit on this and the tools. Some phones with a little bit of more like, good impression. Let me say for example, I'm going with Emily and I'm going to pick the amoeboid. Remember each niche, if even that your niche will be different depending on you would, even You'd fonts will be different depending on your niche. If I'm going with our very techniques, high techniques, I would be picking different colors from if I'm going with anything store. Okay. Because my audience is totally different. See, so you have to do your research to see which fonts are better for each type of audience and so on. Okay, so I'm going to select this here. You can change the size if you wish, of the adding it takes a little bit of time to load. I'm going to keep it a little bit lower, maybe like this. Let me see how it looks. This looks good. And here I can change my body text. I'm also going to change it to Amelie, but I'm going to pick regular. I'm going to click on, Okay, and as you can see, all my text on the page is now different, okay, some themes, the more professional when one's offer more options in here so you can modify, for example, the heading, subheading the buttons, the body tags. So the more complicated, the more professional your theme is, the more options you will be seeing in here. But it's the same principle. You can change the font of your texts. As I, as I said, sometimes offer more options. So things would be like one flexible. However, with our theme, we only have these two options to change and we have changed them. So this is how we change our typography. Now let's go back and let's talk a little bit about colors. Same four colors, okay, This section will be different depending on what theme you are using. But usually all themes offers offer you the option to change your title, okay, So your colors, so he didn't have the heading and link colors here you have the body text, heap, you have the sales price. Here you have the primary buttons that primary labels and the secondary labels and borders. I recommend you when you pick your brand palette to always give your buttons you're strongest color, the color that must that at a demo stand out because you want your customers to be able to spot your color easily. So if you have, for example, brown, white, and orange and your brand, I recommend to give the orange color to your buttons and always give all of your buttons that same color. Because in this way, you will always be leaking the orange color to their call to action and to the decision. So it's always better to keep this consistent and even in your image, even if you're all marketing, you should be always sticking with your brand colors, brand parenthesis, very important for the branding. Okay, after that, you can change the form fields, which means where people enter their email or their name or things like that. Here, you can add image overlays. Image overlays. It's when an image we have tried using elements. The theme is adding an overlay over the whole image. It's like to lower the sharpness of the colors. You can choose the background, the color text, and the opacity. And here you have borders and lines for the pictures. I'm not going to change anything from that from here, but you can do that later on when I'm starting building my theme, I will see if I need to change some colors, but mainly this is it. Okay, so in here you change the colors and the fonts. And let's see if there, if you have anything on their search, we have enabled product suggestions. I recommended to keep it. It shows you saw vendor surprise. You can do that. You can depends on what you want. Okay, here we have social media and this section, you can link all of your social media pages to your store so you can put your Facebook, your Instagram, everything in here. And we go back in here. And also here you can allow people to share their posts, to treat it on Twitter, autopilot on Tantalus. Here we have the favicon. Fabien is the small little image that shows on that Tabs. Okay, let me show you. So I'm going to leave my view screen. This is the fabric and Aki, if you have a logo you have again, should be a smallest size of your logo or maybe the first letter of your stored or something that's that easy at that nice. I'm going to show you how to create a logo later on, maybe in the next lecture. So stay with me, I'm going to talk about that. So you add that having a year, but you have to make sure that it should be scaled down to 32 by 32. So I recommend you to keep it the simplest possible, maybe your small logo, maybe the first letter of your brand. And this is it. Here you have the Add to Cart notifications. It's a straightforward here you have the checkout, it's if you want to customize the checkout and this would be a topic for another lecture and this is it. Okay? So this is mainly wet. You are going to change and the overall settings of the theme. However, in the next lecture we are going to talk about how to create your logo and your polygon so quick and upload them to our soil and we can start with actually customizing the story. So stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 17. How to Create a Logo for Your Store: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture I'm going to show you how you can create a logo for your story. Actually, that in my opinion, the best option would be to go to Fiverr to hire someone to do that for you because this would give you the most professional option. And I also recommend you to go with several freelancers, not only to go with your first option, because this way you will get several options. And also it would be better if you can offer some inspiration for the people who are doing good logo so they can know exactly what do you want. But let's see stare, you want to design new logo by yourself and you want to take the shortest road. And to make things very simple, the first thing I recommend you to do is to go to hatch full from Shopify. It's a place where you can create logos and seconds for your brand. So you go in here and you click on Get Started. And here you pick your industry. So if you are in fashion, health and beauty, home and gardening, and so on, actually, my industry is not very clear in here. So I would pick it as maybe in here. Let me see. And maybe this one maybe it's between these two. Let me see if there is something else I can add. I think this is it. I'm going to click on Next. Okay, here I'm adding a virtual styles. So visual style like what are the things that I'm looking for? I'm looking for something like that or like that and so on. So I would pick something that looks like what I like. Actually, it's none of the above. My business name as knitting needles. My slogan, I don't have one. I can create one if I have, but I don't have one. So I'm going to click on Next. Here, tell us where the logo will be used. Some, I'm going to pick online store or website, social media. I don't use the discard large surfaces. I don't think physical store, I don't think. And I'm going to click on Next. So they have made these logos for me. Well, let me see if there is something that I like and I can go with something that might actually be nice. Very simple, Very nice. Let me see what other options do I have? Maybe this one is nice, but it's a little bit big. Let's say for example, I decided to go with the one I liked above. Let's say this one. Now I can change that a little bit, okay, so I can modify some things in here, not everything, some things. So I go in here two fonts. I can't change the fonts. For example. If I want to pick this one or maybe this one, and so on. Year I can change the handwriting. And here I can go to colors, and I can change our colors to make them fit my brand colors. Okay. It's not that good, not that good. Let's say something like that. So now I have my logo. I can click on Next and I can download the logo. But as I told you before, I don't think that with this option you will get very professional logos. However, if you want to go with it, if you think that you can find what do you need in here, this is an option that you can use. Okay, I'm going back now and I'm going to show you a different tool. This tool, it's called Canva and I use convert all the time. I use all the time. It's one of the tools either tie lot and it allows us to create logos. I'm going in here and I'm going to click on logo. And I'm going to click on logo and general. And see the templates provided by kava. Kava has a free version and a paid version. And even with a fever virginica, you can do a lot. So I recommend you to try it out. It's an awesome tool. So as you can see here, there are many options that you can start with. Many of them are way nicer than the first tool I have showed you. Let me try to see if there is actually something that's related to anything. So as you can see, there are many things that are related to eating. Maybe this one or this one, or maybe this one. They are very nice. I'm going to pick simply this one. And I'm going to modify it. So this is my logo. It looks very good. If I want to change it, I'm going go in here and see what they are suggesting at other options. Okay? And also I can scroll down and see other options, but I'm very satisfied with this option. Okay, I'm going to change this to my brand name. I can't do it like that. Okay, Sure. If you, if you are designing your own your own logo, you should be taking much more time into doing that. I'm doing that quickly just as an example. And here I have my editing. If I want to change this to fit my blending colors here in combat, you can go in here as you can go to your homepage and you can choose your branding kit, which means you can choose your colors and your brand colors. Saved them in here and you blend fonts and save them in here. C2s them directly whenever you are designing something and you why this is important, because then you are designing social media. Social media posts when you are designing good emails, the graphics, and you are doing anything related to your store. It's always good to stay consistent with your brand, colors and fonts. So here I am. I'm going in here to Styles, and I'm going to click in here on my, my, my brand colors. And as you can see, everything is changed, changing by my colors blend. However, for the header section, we need a logo without a background, and we need something like that for the Facebook page and Instagram page. Okay, so I'm going to download a toolbox ready to copy this one. And I'm going in here, I'm going to show you how we can download this without having the background you go and you to download. And in EDA choose to have a transparent background and you simply download the download this image. Now, I will be having a PNG, not a image with a background. I will make this a little bit bigger. And I'm going to download it like that. I guess I didn't mention that I want the background transparent. Yes, I need that. And I'm going to download this one. So now I can download this one in here, and now I have my logo. Okay, so now I'm going back to my Shopify in years, so my theme editor. And here inside of header, I'm going to select a logo. And I'm going to add my logo. So now I have my logo in here. If I want my logo to be like to have a horizontal, horizontal layout, I can go back in here. And instead of having the square shape, I'm going to do that again. I can go on to resizing and I can choose to resize it. I can simply make it smaller, like this. Okay, and simply download it another time with a transparent background. First-world, if you are doing SEO, you should be changing everything to match your keywords, which means you should be putting goods store name in here, Let's say it collects knitting needles, logo. Okay, and I'm going to back to my Shopify store. I'm going to upload the Senior Design. Okay. I should have clarified before let me drop it before. Let me drop it because we didn't resize it on Canvas, so it would be better FE, crop it in here like that. Going to save. I'm going back to in here, I'm going to upload. And I'm going to upload my new logo. It's a little bit small, maybe. Let me see. Okay, this looks better for sure if this is a store that I'm working on, I would be going back and forth with that, but I'm doing this super-quick. Okay, So this is my logo. Now, let's say I want to take this small ion as my fav again. So what I'm going to do, I'm going to remove this. I'm going to resize this and to 32 bytes to because this is the requirements of Shopify. And okay, it should be 40. I can't decide it online or not a problem. Okay. And I'm going to click on resize. Okay. I'm going to make it alphabets like that. Be good. Ok, and I'm going to download either you keep the background or you remove it. Let me say I want to remove it. I'm going to download this. So now I'm downloaded my fav again. Let me call it fast again. Let me go in here. 25 again, select Image Upload. So let me now try to preview my store to show you how this may say first. Let's go in here. Let's go to view. And as you can see now I have my logo in here and I have my fav again in here. So these are very small things that you can do an automaker store look better. I hope this lecture will help you to create awesome logo. But remember I always recommend to your command you either to use Canva all to go with a freelancer to create a professional logo for your story. So if you have some clear, some skills with Photoshop or with Jim, and you are good with that for sure. Go and design UDL, go by yourself. But if you don't have any scale, when it comes to designing, It's always good to hire someone or to use Canva. So the set for this lecture, stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 20. How to Search for Themes and What to Look For: Hello there and welcome to this lecture. In this lecture I'm going to show you how to use Shopify themes stored in order to find the perfect theme for your store. Well, the lecture you are watching now has been updated after Shopify online store 2, because now we have so many new themes to choose from. And in this lecture I'm going to show you how to explore these themes and how to find a fifth theme is good for your business or good for your store, so you can choose it. Well, this is the homepage of Shopify themes. And as I told you before, I prefer if you pick a theme from this website because it's a Shopify theme, it was validated and approved by Shopify. I prefer if you don't use anything from a third party. Because even if the theme you are buying is very fancy and expensive and it's coming from a very well-known web developer company. It's still not approved by Shopify, it's still not here. So I prefer to pick one from the themes in here. Their prices are okay. They are usually vetted, verified, and they perform very well on desktop, on mobile. And they always they are always updated because to stay on the Shopify Theme Store, they need to be updated. So for example, a bunch of phone lines start to 0 happened all the themes inside of Shopify Theme Store where updated to be to be equivalent or to work with the new update. So this is the homepage and as you can see, this is one of the first Shopify free themes that you will meet. It's called taste. And there are six different free themes provided by Shopify. I guess they are either six or seven. We are going to see them in a few minutes. So this is the first team and as you can see in here, they invite you to explore or themes. In here you can explore if you are by, let's say by category. So you have selling in person, selling internationally, then you have the style, then you have browse by industry. If you want to directly go to a theme related to your industry, what I do usually is to go in here to all themes explored from here. You can always go in here to choose from here, to start from here, or to start from here. These tabs and environment to help you to make your work easier. But I prefer to go in here from all themes and start from here to filter my results to find what I want. Well, first, you need to make sure that the team you are choosing is equivalent or it works with online store 2. But first you need to make sure that the team you are using was updated to Shopify online store 2. So this option is a must. You need to filter the themes by this option. This is the first thing I need you to do. Then in here, you can choose to see the free themes or to see only the Pythium. It's a paid themes, It's up to you. Well, this is one of the questions I received demos, should I go with a free theme? Or it is enough to go with a free theme, or should I pay for a professional theme? Wet? As a personal preference, I always prefer to invest on a good thing because I think that creating your store is a job that takes time. And I prefer if you do it once and you will do it right? So you go directly with a professional theme with all the options you are looking for. However, if you don't have enough money and if you are not willing to invest, it's fine to go with a free themes, especially after online store 2, because now you can even make better stores with these themes. But I repeat, if you have some money to invest, I recommend you to buy a professional theme. And remember it's a onetime payments, so you only pay once and that's it. At most of the Shopify themes, prices are between $250 to $350 and that's it. It's a onetime payment. I will start by showing you the free themes. Then we will go to explore the P Themes. And I'm going to show you my favorite themes in here. Now, let's start with a free theme. So as you can see in here, you can see the list of all the available free themes and you can explore all of them that don't theme is the first theme Shopify released after Shopify online store 2. And it's one of the very best teams in this collection. You can try to explore all of these different options, but I'm going to start with this one. Since this this is the oldest one, in my opinion, the best one. When you go in here you can see that this team is free. You can check out the free demo and you can check out, let's say the most important points about this theme. As you can see, it's great for clothing and accessories. It's suitable for any catalog size, and it has this special features for anything you are exploring inside of Shopify themes, you will see these options. So you can know if you are choosing that option for your store. When you scroll further down, you will see the main key elements of the theme, as well as some more features in here, you will read the reviews and you will see if there are any support and recommendations. If you scroll further down, usually you will see more themes by the same developer if it's not a free theme like this one. So for example, here we have more themes by Shopify. And if you aren't exploring a professional theme, paid one, you will see other stores that are using the same exact theme. So you can get a feeling about how your store will look like. We're going to see that also in few minutes, but stay with me. Going in here to view them are stored in order to explore this theme. Here, I am checking out the desktop view. If you scroll down, you can find, you can check out the homepage, see what sections they have, and so on. Why God checking if the aim, what I recommend you to do the most is to check the homepage, make sure that it has all the sections you want to have inside of your store. So for example, if you want to have a shop, they look section inside of your store. And if the theme you are checking out doesn't have this section, don't buy the steam and don't go with it. If you sell clothes or if you sell items that go together, choose a theme that has the option you want, which is sharply and they took all bundled together or so on. Also, the second thing I recommend you to do is to check out the product page. The product page is one of the most important pages on your site. So go to the product page. Some things have very big placements for images and photos. So if you can provide high-quality photos like these ones, for example, maybe it's not the good choice to go with that don't seem because you can't provide this high-quality photos. I'm going to show you actually a theme. I guess it's called let me check out. It's a paid one, actually, but it has a very huge placement for photos. So unless you can actually go with this huge photos, your store will look very bad. It's called, I guess, showcase, if I'm not mistaken. Yeah, It's this case theme. When, for example, you explore it. If you go to any product page, you will see that the size of the product image is extremely big. So let me show you. So can you see the resolution than in that resolution is extremely big. So unless you can provide such photos, I don't recommend you to go with a theme that showcase that much. You would photos of our huge images. Same if you go, for example, with this name, this view in here, it's another option. You will see, for example, that for the product page, they have this huge placements for photos. Unless you can take huge like ls, you can produce such photos. Non go with this theme, go with a theme that has simpler placements or smaller placements for photos. Let me go back to that old theme because this is the theme you are checking. So going good on all themes, going to this one. So the product page of the adamantium is actually good. It has in here than needed information also, you had the tabs are so you can add sections. Well, the good news after Shopify online store 2 is that any page, any, any page digitally on your store can be modified and can be improved. So before Shopify online store 2, we were only able to add sections inside of the homepage. So we were able to design our homepage as we wish. But when it comes to the product pages, to the collection pages, to the normal pages, we were forced to use one template which was provided by default by the team and it was very basic. So you have the photos, you have the product information, and that's it. Now with Shopify online. So 2, you can modify your product pages in the same way you modify any landing page or your homepage. So you can add sections, you can add elements, and I'm going to show you all of that later through this course. So that's why using finite installed to 2 is very important because it allows you to create a better product pages with more information. We're showing more photos, more perspective of the product, providing more information about the product. So you can help your customers to make informed decisions whether to buy your products or not. Okay, in addition to checking the desktop view, I always recommend you to check the mobile view. As you can see, for example, that don't theme is that okay team, it's not a bad thing, but it doesn't provide any of the advanced options I look for while I'm checking. Let me show you, for example, the difference between this, the difference between this team and another professional team that I usually use. And I'm going to show you why I always go with the professional paid themes. Going in here, going back in here to all themes, I would precisely choose the paid themes. And I will look for one of my favorite themes in here. Let's see if I will directly find her, find it or if I need to search Google. So let me go to the second page. It's not yet here also. Maybe I have missed it, but anyway, I'm going to search for it on Google to find the directory. So this is the theme. Focus is actually one of my favorite Shopify themes because it is very professional and it offers so many options that I like starting my year. You can try the theme for free. You can download it to your store. Try it out. Have a feeling about how your skull, your store will look like before even purchasing it. You need only to purchase it when you want to make it live. So when you need to publish it. If you scroll down in here, you will read and know more about this team. And if you scroll further down, you can see a store is using focal, which is something I told you about before. So you can see other stores that are using your same, the same theme. And then here you would find more information and then hear more and more. Let me go to the demo store to tell you exactly why I like this team. So you can know how to choose the theme for your store. As you can see, when you will end in the store, you can notice that they have the slideshow, which is common between all themes. And in here in the first slide, I can see, for example, that they are providing two different buttons. So I can have one slide linking to do different things. But usually I always prefer to have one clear call-to-action button. But if you sell, for example, man and woman closing clause and you want to directly read your customers toward the right collection. This is perfect. You can put a woman and man button, buttons, and that's it. So this is this slideshow. This is nothing fancy. It's common between all themes. In here, I have the header and these are the mega menus. So these usually that may go and use you only find them on professional teams. I don't think any of the free themes have these mega menus. They are amazing because they showcase a product inside of the navigation menu in a very elegant and in a very visually attractive way. So, yeah, Megan news is one of the things that I like about professional themes going in here. As you can see, I can, I have the navigation divided between topics. We are going to see how to do that later through this course. And in here you have the collections. If you scroll down in here, you can notice that they have in here a section showing the different collections. I like this section because it allows me to showcase different collections while only taking the same states placement from my homepage. I liked this section, but this is not the reason why I use this theme. One of the reasons why I use this theme is that when you hover over the products, you can directly add them to cart in here from the homepage without accessing even the product page, I can click here on Add to cart. And I will have my product added to cart as simple as that. So my product now is added to cart. Now, if you check another demo store from the same theme, you will notice that they have a driver card where you can see the items you have inside of your card. If you want to check out, you can check out directly. We are going also to see that. As you can see, this is my cart and I have two items at the theme tells me if I'm already eligible for free shipping or not. So as you can see in here, they are telling me that I'm eligible for free shipping. So why setting up your theme settings? You can tell them, for example, that you offer free shipping or over all orders for all orders above $50. So in here I will know that actually that I have free shipping. If my item is below the free shipping threshold, they will tell me how much I still need to add to my car to get the free shipping. Also in here, you have some product recommendations, which is amazing. You can change these that are coming by default using Shopify. I go to them, but they are already very good. And when you click it on checkout, you can check out that actually. This is one of the reasons why I like this theme. If that product you are choosing has variants. So instead of adding directly to cart, you can click here on quick view. You can view it that actually in here and added to cart as simple as that. Okay. Now scrolling further, this is another section which is an amazing section to talk about your brand or talk about different topics or maybe about your brand mission and so on. And here you have the shop they look or bite together section. It's an amazing section because it allows you to increase your average order value. So for example, if you are selling bags, you can show a photos, showing the bag with a matching shoes and you can tell your customers to buy them together. So here when I click on the point, I can directly click on quick view and I can add the product directly from here without the need to go to the product page or to check the product page. I can do everything from this section. And the good news is everything you've seen here. Everything, all the sections you need, you see in here are sections that you can add to your product pages. Inside of your product page, for example, going back to the bank example, you can add a section showing the bag with the shoes. And in this way they will be adding the shoes to their purchase and you will be increasing good average order value. So this section is amazing. I like it so much and it is very good for so many types of industries and so many businesses. If you scroll down in here, you will find the blog, you will find more sections and so on. Now, if you, if you choose to see the mobile view, that is also something I like so much about this. This theme is that when you scroll down, you can tell them to keep the Add to Cart button in here. So when this appears, I have down below, which is very good for user experience that allows customers to buy easier. It's something very, very recommended. And also, if you go to the homepage, you can see that the shop they look or the product recommendation sections also works like a sharp. So when you click in here, you have that quick and nearby you click Add to Cart and you buy it. And then here you have the card, It's perfect, everything is clear. You also have that you may also like in here section if you want to add more products to the cart. So this is one of my favorite themes because it provides so many sections and so many options related directly to the marketing, related directly to increasing the average order value of the customer. Related, related directly to improving my Cs. It's not only about the design, remember, it's also about the smart techniques that you use in order to push customers to buy more from you. Now adding to the collection pages, for example, if you go in here to the iPhone cases, okay, when you land on this collection page, as you can see they have in here the smart filter with images, which is also an amazing option. Unification is very important because the easier and more visually attractive it is, the easier for your customers to buy. If I can directly find what I'm searching for. This is amazing. This is what you should be looking for while you are organizing your navigation, while you are organizing your collection pages, you'll forget everything else. You need to make sure that your customers are able to find that they are looking for these, let's say virtual menus. These visual filters are very good because they help their customers greatly. Also in here you have more filters. If you go to the product page and here you have the photos in here, that sizes are very normal. They are not very huge. Well, yep. Customers can always zoom and see more in details, but it's still a very acceptable size. In here you have the tabs, so you have the description that tag the review you have in here some product recommendations, which is also amazing because if I'm buying this product, for example, you are recommending this, these to me, most probably I will be adding them to the card. Remember, this is very similar to what Amazon do when you go to Amazon. They suggest related to products, frequently bought together products in order to help the customers to find things they need. And at the same time in order to increase the average order value. Well, the good news is after Shopify online store 2, things like this, the bite with section that the text specifications, they are now dynamic, which means that for each product page, for each product, I can have different content inside of the sections. For example, they buy it with, for this product, this iPhone would be different from another product I have on my store and I can do that using something we called metaphase. I'm going to show you how to use with their fields. And they are amazing. Believe me. They are a little bit not complicated, but I'm, I'm very sure they are new to any of you, so just stay with me. I'm going to explain to you everything in so much details. But as I told you now after Shopify online store 2, you can create dynamic sections inside of your product pages, sections that differ from a product to another before Shopify online store 2, the only dynamic sections where the product photos, the title, the price, and the description. Now we can create as much as we wish of dynamic sections. And not only that, we can have photos, we can have text, we can have PDF files, whatever we wish. I'm going to show you all of that later through this course. So this is the product page. It has a frequently asked questions section, which is something this theme, an option section this team provides and so on. So as I told you also before, after Shopify online store 2, now we can add sections to our product pages and the same way we used to add sections to the homepages. So we can also modify and optimized our product pages in a very amazing way. So we can add as much sections. As I told you before, after Shopify online store 2, now we can add sections to the product pages. So these sections are all in here. We can add them, we can remove them, we can replace them with other sections. And we are going to see all of that through this course. So this is one of the themes I liked, but this is not the only thing I liked that aren't many good things on the Shopify Theme Store. When you're going into all themes. And if you decide to go with a P theme, you can after the filtering by their paid filter by the industry. So if for example you sell home and garden, you go that I came here to home and garden. And you explore these themes. Usually when you filter by industry, you will see specific sections related to the industry itself. So foreclosing, maybe you will need chocolate, they look maybe for garden and Tom, you will need something else. That's why I recommend you to use the industry as one of your filters. It makes your life way easier. And not only that, when you see something or products similar to what you sell, you will be able to get a better feeling about how you store will look like using this theme. Yours is also one of the themes I like. It's a very good thing. Actually. It's, it's it's new to the team, so I guess it hasn't been released after Shopify online store 2. It is amazing. It offers so many options. I really like it. If you go to the demo store, you can see how professional it is. You can see the amount of options it has. It's a very, very good theme and it even has one, I guess, one demo with a one product store. So if you sell only one product, this is gonna be a very good inspiration store for you. Okay? So, there are so many options in here and so many themes in here to choose from. I'd recommend you to take your time to explore by industry, to explore by, in here, what are the options you are looking for? So for example, the layout that design that catalog style. Not long ago we was able to adhere to even filter by the options like if you want to shop there, Look, if you want to, if you want a section about delighted to buy it together and so on. I'm not sure why they have removed this from here, but it was very, very useful. So what I recommend you to do is to go in here and explore the themes, see what you like. Make sure that the theme you are choosing has almost all the sections you want to have inside of your store. Remember, you can always check the demo source. You can always throw anything you are seeing before even buying it. One final thing I need to say before finishing this lecture, and it's actually one of the most common questions I received whenever you, I've taking ethylene, whenever you are checking, everything you see in one of the demo store is something you can do in your, in your, in your neuron stone. Here, exploring the prestige team. So let's say for example, for the alert, then we'll store, I saw that they have, for example, this section, even if you don't see it and the other demos, you can still apply it, okay? Demos are different ways of how they use the theme to create stores, but you can combine features from them. They are just a different way to showcase that theme. The option you see in one of the demo store is applicable for any them or you start with. So that's it for this lecture and the next lecture I'm going to show you how to add it mean for your store and how to start using it. So that's it for this lecture. I hope you enjoyed that. Stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 21. How To Manage Your Navigation Menus: Hello there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to talk about the navigation menus. And usually on any store we have two main navigation menus. First it's the one we have and the header, and the second one, the one we have in the footer. Well, these two menus are different and they serve two different purposes. The main menu in here, which is the navigation menu we put on the header section, is the most important menu because it's where new visitors go to explore. But your store offer all to find what they are searching for. So this is an example from pipette. Pipette is a brand that offers a wide range of products related to shampoo, to skincare and so on. As you can see, when I ran on this store, the first thing or the first place, I usually go to an order to understand what is happening is the navigation menu. And then here they have divided their products by collections. So I can find easily what I'm looking for if I'm a mom, for example, and I'm looking for products for my babies or for my kids. I can directly go in here, click on kids or hover over kid. And I can see all the different categories they have. Same for baby if I'm a mom, this is where I find the products related to me or simply by checking the header from here, dam and you bought from here. I knew directly that this brand sells products related to babies, kids, moms, and dads, and so on. Well, if I'm a father for example, I would know that actually that I have no products in here for myself. This navigation menu play plays the role of a map. So imagine like you audit a piece and you want to reach your destination. This is how you should do organising good menu. You should be organising your menu so you can help your customers find what they are searching for. Or if they are not searching for a specific thing to help them know what you said. Usually when any visitor lands on your store, this is the first place where they would be going. This is how we behave when you go to install, we go to the menu, we try to find what we are looking forward in that I need you to think deeply about your menu and how to organize your items, and how to organize your products inside of this menu. One tip I always like to give all my clients is to go to big brands in your niche. They don t need to be selling your same exact product, maybe something similar, but choose brands that target your same audience and see how they have organized their menu bars and learn from them. Going back to this example in here, as you can see under baby, they have organized their products by the type of the product. So we have in here the shampoo, lotion, the bond that also that ocean. But here they have divided the product by the problems. So if I'm a mom and I want a solution for my baby, he has a dry skin. The first place I would go in here to baby, then I would go to this section here because I know and I find the solution for my problem. Or if I'm a mom of a baby with a sensitive skin, that's what I would go to the sensitive skin. But if I'm a mom and I won't lotion for my baby, I can find the solution directly from here. So as you can see inside of this tab in here, they have led me to their products in two different ways. The first way is by showing the problems. So if I know my problem, I can directly find the solution. And the second way is that type, because people who are lending on the store searching for products for their babies, they either know exactly what they want. So either they know the product they want, or they have a problem and they want the solution. This is a very smart way of organising the menu. Going back to kids, we have the same thing. Going back to moms, we have the same thing and so on. As you can see, they have started their menu bar with their bestsellers. And this is also, in my opinion, smart. Always starts your menu bar with the most important thing to you. Bestsellers are wrestlers for a reason. People like them for a reason. So if you have a big catalog of view of products and you don't want to confuse your customers. And you want director to give them what they are looking for. Having a bestseller tab in here is amazing. The same tab, I recommend you to have it inside of the homepage. I recommend you to have a bestseller section inside of your homepage. We will talk about this when we reach the homepage lecture. But this is very important. And here they have their sets which lead directly to that Sets collection and about, and then here they have divided it by more information about the brand and so on. Now, let's see another example from another brand and let's see how they organized that header section. The second example we are going to see is a low yoga. Yoga is a very famous brand and they sell sports outfits, as you can see. And we are going to check the menu bar. The first item they have is then u, n, and inside of this item they are linking to that in US collection. In the previous example, we have seen the best sterile collection at the beginning. And also this is another smart option to include the new end because if a brand have so many collections. Brand always come out with new products and new inventions. It's very good to have a new and collection. This is usually very recommended for clothes brands, for shoes brands because they have up to four different collections during the year. They have their winter collection, the summer or the fall collection and so on. So having a new collection is actually very good because usually when people land on a store, if they are repetitive customers, especially they are looking to the newest things like when you go to Zara, the first thing you will be looking at is then New and collections. Same in here for a clothing brand. So after, for a close bond, same in here for this brand because they sell clothes. After that they have woman, men, and then they have beauty and dwellers and they have a, they have swept. As you can see, they have divided in here that products between their main sections, the main collections. So a woman, man, gear, beauty, wellness, and swim. These are the main collections. If I'm a woman, I would know directly that I should be going in here to find what I'm looking for. So I landed in here. And in here they have first the trending section, which is also a smart thing. Then they have their eyebrows and tubs. They have the buttons, they have that jackets, they have the accessories, then they have the active activity. Because if I do yoga, I might not be sure what brushes I use with what lagging and with what accessories. So what they have done is they helped me by allowing me to search products or to see them by activity. This is the same thing to what pipette that they have divided the product between problems and between product types. And here they are doing the same. They have the product types than they have the activity. Here. They have that trending, so they have the new arrivals that the bestsellers also they have shocked by color if you wanted to find something in a specific color, and as you can see, they have pattern and the prints and so on. So if I am a woman lending in here, this menu in here can help you, can help me to find exactly what I'm looking for because it answers all of my questions. First, I have my own collection under it. I have everything I'm searching for. Same if I am a man, same for gear, and so on. This is exactly what you should be doing inside of your navigation menus. I see so many people thinking that this is something they took for granted. It's easy. They just named some collections and that's it. That's not the case. You shouldn't be thinking about your navigation menu in this way, your navigation menu is one of the most important elements of your store. You need to think from a customer perspective, from a visitor perspective, how they should be seeing your products, what kind of organization or what kind of setup. So you should put yourself in your customers shoes and you suit find the best setup that will help your customers to find what they are searching for through the navigation menu. Because if your navigation menu get them confused or if it doesn't reply to their questions or help them to find what they are searching for, they will leave without buying. And if a new customer is standing on your store, and if the navigation menu didn't help them to understand what your store sells, that's it. You lost a customer, you lost this visitor at maybe for ever. So, take good care of organizing your navigation menu. And as I told you, I highly recommend you to check out big brands and new niche to learn from them and to apply something very similar in your store. Now we've been moving to Shopify to see how we are going to create a navigation menus inside of Shopify. So you can learn how we can create your own navigation menus. So here I am inside of Shopify and this is a demo stored and it has only four different products in here. They are all related to hair and skin care. What I'm going to do first is to create my collections. So let's say for example, we are going to apply the same example we have seen before about dividing the products by type and by solution. So the first collection I would have is to have a collection for hair and to have a collection for skincare because I have both types of products, I'm going to need to collections. I will create a new collection and I will call it skincare. Okay. I will choose this to be manual, but you can choose it to be automated. When you choose automated, you create a condition and based on this condition, your products will be added to the collection. So for manual, I will click on Save. This is my first collection. Then I will go and create my second collection. And this time the collection would be haircare. Now I will go back to my product and I will assign our divide them between these two collections. So let me, let me before just create some other collections. I'm gonna create another collection, but this time it's based on the problem. So I'm going to create, for example, a one for sensitive skin. I will create one, for example, for another one related to skincare, let's say dry skin. I will move in here and create a collection, for example, for what else do we have under skin? Maybe we have a dry, we have sensitive. Let's say we want to add a collection related to hair for, let's call it For example, this time it's divided by type. So shampoo. Let's put cream as another collection. So let me go back to the products in here. So starting by this product, I'm going to assign this product to two different collections. That first collection is gonna be the skincare because it is related to skincare. Then I will have it under let's say this is for dry skin, under dry skin and also it is a cream. So I'm gonna give it also this collection. Okay, it's now under three different collections. I'm going to save it. I will move to the second product. Now, this is the one in here. I will choose it under dry skin. I will who is a skincare? And I don't have a type, and I will click on Save. Let's move to the next product. This is a shampoo. So in here other collections, I will have hair care, I will have shampoo. You can have so many other options, like, for example, the hair type and so on. It's just an example. In here. I will put it under cream, I will put it under skincare and sensitive skin. Okay. So these are my four different products and I have assigned that I'd collections for all of them. Now what I need you to go to do is to go to the online store and to go to Navigation. And what we will be changing as the main menu, It's the homepage menu. So now it has home, it has catalog, it has contact. You can have a Home tab, but it's not necessarily honestly, the catalog is a tab, I guess that shows you that showing you everything. But we are going to delete all of this to start with something else. We didn't create a bestseller collection. Let me go to the products in here to the collections that may create a bestseller one. So create collection, I'm going to call it a bestseller. I will go to the products and assign this collection maybe to this one, for example. So in here, I will add bestsellers. Save, let me pick another one to add to the collection. So it's also a best seller. Okay. Going back to online store two navigations. And then he'd go into the main menu. The first step I'm going to create, it's going to call it a bestseller. And in here I will be linking to the collection that's called best-sellers. So this is my first step. Now let me create another tab. This time it's going to be skincare. If I don't want it to link to anything, you can add the hashtag like this, and it's not been linking to any link. But instead I will link it to the skin, skin care collection. Then I will add the other main menu, which is the haircare collection. I'm not sure if this is one word or two words. I'm going to keep it as it is. So now we have our main collections. What I'm going to do is to create sub-collections. So under the skin care, I will have another collection. This time it's gonna be shocked by problem. For example. I will make it like this so it doesn't link. So anything I would click on Add. I will move it to be under skincare. So now it's a sub collection. Now I really create undershot by problem and other sub-collections. This time it's gonna be shop by type. Also, I'm going to add the hashtag. Click on Save. So what I need to do now is to create sub-collections for the sub collection. So I'm going to click here on sensitive skin. I will choose the sensitive skin collections. So in here, this is the one. I will move it like this and put it under it. So now it's a sub collection. I will add another one that's say dry skin. Same for the show by type. I'm going to put shampoo. Shampoo. It's not even in here. I'm going to put the cream and I will link to that cream collection. Okay? So this one is gonna be under here, under clean. You can do the same for the hair care. I'm not gonna do that. I will click on Save Menu. So as you can see now I have these 123 main types and under it as skincare, I have the sub collection which is shocked by problem. It has these elements. Then I have the shop by type, and it has this element. I would go back to my online store. And in this case I'm using that don't theme, which is the one that comes by default. As you can see, this is my menu in here showing on the header. If you click on header, you can see that I need to include my logo. But you can also see that the menu I'm linking to, and here is the main menu. You can change this and replace it by another menu if you wish. But that is no reason because we have updated the main menu. So when you click in here, you can see that I have this sub menu. Then I have the sub menu in this free theme, which is that don't theme, this doesn't look very good. But if you are using a professional theme, this is gonna look different. It especially if you can use mega menus. So when you click on the header and here you can see all the elements that you can change. So you have background, the colors. You are going to see that in the next lecture. Okay, I'm going now to see how this may differ if you are using a professional theme, we're going to use the focal theme as an example. I'm going to download the trial and show you how this is gonna look inside of the focal themes. So stay with me. This is the focus theme I want to use. I will click on Try theme. Here I will put my URL and click on Login one more time. So now the theme is added to my, is being added to my store. And I will have it under the themes section. So as you can see, this is the theme trial. What I need to do is just click on Customize. You don't need to pay anything unless you want to publish a theme. Okay, So this is the theme. If you go in here to the header, you can see that we have selected our main menu. What I needed to go is to go with what we call add mega menus. This n option that's used widely available for all professional teams. So you go to mega menu. And here you need to precise for which of these elements, of these menu elements who are creating the mega menu. So let's say I'm creating it for the skincare. Okay? Then I need to choose the, what I'm going to showcase inside of this mega menu. So let's say I want to showcase one of my products. I will pick this one. Let's say this one. So I figured that photo and I can add heading, I can add text and I can link to my products. I can click in here towards the product. Let's say this is the one and I will have my products. Well, let's put, for example, face cream. So this is a good place to show your main products or your bestsellers, for example. So I'm going to add in other, in other products. Let's say now this one. You can also write in here whatever you wish. So face serum in here you link to the product, so you go to products willing to it, for example, I guess this is the one, and that's it. You click on Save. So now as you can see, let me stop this. As you can see when I hover over it here, I see my sub-collections And I see my mega menus. You can do the same with the hair care. You can do the same with all of your makeup of your menu items. Okay? So I think that mega menus are very useful and they make your navigation way, way better. And this is one of the features that I like about the professional teams. However, you need to keep in mind that mega menus are usually not available on mobile. So on mobile. Well actually available. However, I need you to keep in mind that for some themes that may govern news are not available on mobile. It's okay for this team, for example, let's check if there are now available. If you click in here, well, yes, they are available, which is amazing. So you can also have them on mobile. This is about navigation and how to organize your navigation menu. The second menu you need to take care of. So this is about your main menu. Now we are going to see that footer menu. This is the menu you have in here. And usually in this menu you need to put all of your use for links. So let's go back to one of our examples to see what they have put in there. This is the alloy yoga store, and if you scroll down to the footer collection, you can see that they have linked to the customer service, to their account information, somewhat information about the brand, a form to sign up to their newsletter, their social media profiles. And that's it. You can do exactly the same. No need to link back to your collections. No need to link back to your products in here, use this section to link to the other pages you didn't link to in the main menu bar in here. Put all of these information in here. But between even though they have in the menu bar and here they don't have an About Us section. I like to have an About Us tab. And here this is one of the things I look at whenever I'm visiting a new store. So you can use must add an About Us section in here with a loyal gases they are, they are a very well-known brand. People know them already. The About Us section might not be as important as for a new small brand that's just starting out or have been for another market for a small time. People don't know your brand yet. So people don't know your brand yet and they need to know more about it. That's why I recommend you to have an About Us section in here. Okay. Now let's move back to Shopify to see how to modify your footer menu. So going back in here, you got also the navigation. And one more time you go in here to the footer menu this time, and you change the menu from here. It's exactly the same way you do the main menu. You put your main tabs, you put the sub-tabs and inside of them and that. So that's it for the navigation menus. I highly recommend you to take your time deciding how to divide your products and what is the best way to set up your navigation to make it easier for your customers to find what they are searching for. Your navigation menu is extremely important. Good care of creating a good one. That's it for this lecture, I hope it will help you to create amazing navigation menus for your store. Remember, your navigation menus are extremely important. So take your time creating them and setting them up. In the next lecture. Bye bye. 22. How To Customise Your Homepage Dawn Theme - Shopify Online Store 2.0: Hello there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture, as I promised you, we are going to see how to change and modify your homepage. And then this lecture we are going to use that don't theme, which is the free Shopify theme as an example, the next lecture we are going to do the same work with a focused theme, which is a professional paid theme. Going in here to Shopify dashboard, you go to online store and you go to themes. Here you have multiple actions that you can choose from, but we are not going to touch them now, I'm going to click on Customize. Whenever you are installing a new theme, the first thing or the first place I want you to go to is the theme settings that are so many things that you can set up in here. And that will help you to see how your store will look like. So you need to start first with the colors. Then you need to go to the topography to put your typography. And we will see after that how we are going to modify the homepage. Let's start by the color and let's use the brand book we created in the previous lecture to add our colors in here. So this is my brand book in here. And as you can see, these are the different colors I have. This is my text color and this is my logo. So I'm going in here to the colors first. And this is the primary color. It's used as foreground color on accent colors. So if you are, if you have an accent color in Shopify, you can have one main color, which is for example in here that the white and you can have another accent color, okay? So in here you are choosing the accent color, which is the second color. And then here you are choosing the color of the button that comes over the accident, the first accent color. I don't want you to get lost with that. Okay. Does fill in the colors and you will start seeing them in the store and it will start adjusting them as you go. So for the accent one, I'm going to choose this. Let's see the slight blue. I'm going to copy the hex. And for the first accident one I'm going to paste it in here. Okay? Then for the, you can add the gradients. I'm not gonna do that for the second accent. I'm gonna pick this one for example. Okay? Now for the buttons, I will keep, you know, something, I will keep the orange for the buttons because it's fun. It's my strongest one. I will give this color as the second accent. Okay. Now in here I'm changing the tax, tax. So I'm going back in here to copy my text hex already, I know it already, but I want to show you how to do it from here. So you copy that, paste it in here. And this is my color text. For the outline button, I'm going to pick the orange. Okay. Let's say for this one, I pick the pink. Okay, This is too much, so I'm gonna keep it as what? Huggy, let's see this one in here. How will this will look like? Okay, that's why I always recommend you to fill everything. Then you start modifying as you go. For example, I didn't like this in here, so I would go back to the white. Okay, these options differ so much on the theme you are using, okay? So it depends on the theme you are using. After funny that colors in here. The second thing I want you to do is to go to the topography and fun in your typography. So for titles, we have chosen lobster. For the text. We have chosen this one. Okay? So we have put the colors in here. Later on, we can come back in here and modify them if we didn't like them. So I think that the topography you have the layout so you can change the page width, you can change the vertical spacing between sections. You can also change the grids if you wish, and so on. Let's keep this for later. Now. Let me go in here and start creating my homepage. So we'll start. So we will start by creating the homepage. Then as we go, we will be filling out the settings from here whenever we need to. Okay, let me start for example. Let me start first by saving the theme. Then I was starting here by the first element I have in the homepage, which is the announcement. But by the way, you can light this on to activate inspector, using this, you can inspect each section. So when you click on it, you would know the name of it. You can modify it if you wish. Okay. I'm not gonna keep it activated. I don't actually like it so much. So you click on the announcement bar in here. This is a place where you should be putting any important announcements, like for example. Free shipping on all domestic orders. You can change the color. I prefer to change the color actually, and you can choose between the colors you have put inside of your eye, color settings of the theme. So let me go back in here to see what I have put. So I have x and one, x and two, I have the background one and the background too, I guess, which all are white. Let me try to modify this to pink. No, I prefer it as white. So I'm gonna choose x and one for this announcement bar. Okay? If you're already using like a more professional theme, usually you can change the accent color for each element without Nadine to choose one of the themes settings. I don't exactly like the colors in here, so I'm going back in here, two colors, and in here I'm just going to change this to w, okay? Because I want to make this legible. I will see if I can add an image in here. Let's see fireworks or something, or stars. Yes, I can do that. I can copy this and add it at that. Okay. So we have this in here and below it, you can add other announcements, so you can have multiple announcements. Let's say I want to add another announcement. You can have it below. I don't actually like this. This I don't like the idea that the announcements are coming one after the other. I'm not sure why Shopify is the wing that usually for professional teams announcement would be like scrolling, scrolling one after the other is showing like a slide bar, which is something very elegant. I'm not sure why we don't have the option in here. Hopefully we will have it soon. Then we have the header. The header is this section here. If you light and your inspector, this is the header. Okay, what I'm going to do is to first upload my logo because it's going to be in here. Then I will work out on these elements. So let me start in here. As you can see, this is the color scheme. I can change it in here, their colors if I wish. I can make it blue. I can make it orange. Background, one background too. I would actually keep it as white. And I would choose in a logo. So this is my logo. I will choose my local. I don't want you to worry about this option you saw in head. Or if you remove this one, this option, we are going to talk about dynamics versus dated through this course. Just ignore it for now at the homepage. You don't need it. So let me choose this one. Again. I'm going to make it a little bit bigger, maybe a little bit more. I like it now. You can center it top-left. You can center, top center, or you can center it middle left. I prefer this position in here. Here you choose their menu. So this is our menu, the menu we have created previously. As you can see, we have the below menus are menus. In here. You can choose if you want to use my gamma news or drop menus. So this is the Omega menu option. This is actually a new option and that don't seem okay. So let's see what we will see in here. We will see something like this. I guess this is even better. Okay? You can show separator line. So you can enable sticky header. This is good. Now we don't have anything to change in here. You can also change top and bottom padding if you wish. So if you want to minimize this whitespace you have in here, I'm going to make both of them, let's say ten. I guess this is a reasonable type is also good. Okay? This is my header for now, as I said before it and the header section, you should be putting all the most important information so you can put the best seller, the skincare, hair care about us and so on. And remember, in order to change things in here, you need to change your navigation menu, which you'll find under Themes and navigations. I'm gonna save this for now. So now I have my announcement bar and I have my sections. These sections are common between all of your pages. Okay, So that's why you have this line in here because these elements are common. So if you've gotten here and you go to a product page, for example, they will remain the same. They are common between all pages. Let's go back to the homepage. Let's start with these sections one after the others. These actions were actually added by Shopify by default, these came in here. You can remove them and start from scratch or you can keep them for now. The image manner is this first image you see in here. This is the place where your customer's land first. So this is a place where you should tell your customers what your brand is about. Okay, for this section in here, you need to use an image that looks good and that allows your text. To look at appear good, Okay, if you go, for example, to PayPal.com, which is a store we have Sobe saw before. As you can see in here. Just let's wait for it to load. Okay, they have the image, they have a very clean space to put the text. We can create the same image or something very similar using Canva, it's very easy, it's very straight forward. You can create this image, keep an empty space in here. I'd put your text in here. But for this example, I'm going to use an image that I have found over the Internet. So I'm gonna click on Select Image. And I will upload my image, which is this one. Okay, now I have my image. The first thing I want you to do is to always place your text even, even in the middle and data center or in heat or even preferred in here because people use when you read from left to right. So it's easier for them to read the text if it is in here, don't put it in here, put it in here, make it the center of attention. Okay, now let's select, I would show, show you how to change the text position in 1 second. You can also add a second image. And when you do that, the screen will be split between two images. I'm not going to do that. Here we have the overlay capacity, and as you can see in here, we have a black overlay over the image. If I lower that to 0, I have no overlay. If I increase this, I have dark black. Because it's a baby store. I want colors. I want vivid colors. I prefer if I don't use the overlay at oil, but since my text is white and now I will see if I need to change this. I would keep it for a few seconds. So by their height is either small or large or medium. I prefer medium or I prefer to make it adapt tied to first image size. So the size of the image, since this one is very high. So either I need to crop it before uploading it, or I simply choose medium instead. Okay, now for the text's content position, I'm going to put it on the left and I'm going to put the center, let's see, left, center. The left. Okay. It's okay. Let's center the text to the left. Okay, so this is what I have now. Let's choose another color. Okay, it's not, it's further containers. So for this one, now, I'm going to put a container. I don't like it. What other options we have? We have the mobile layout, which is amazing if you would want to check them all by layout. This is how this is going to look on my way. I still think that this text should be in blue and white. It's not contrasting well, it doesn't grab attention, so I'm gonna change it mostly probably in here. If you have multiple images, you can choose to stack them on mobile or short also the container on mobile, I don't like to show the container. The container, it's this element. I don't like to show it. I prefer to keep my texts it as it is. So I need to go back to the theme settings to change this color. So it should be at me, figured out where it should be. So I tried to figure out a way to change the colors of the stacks, but unfortunately, I didn't find a way. As I told you, that this is some of the problems you face when you use a free theme. Customization is limited. The only way you can change the colors in here, if you go to click on Show container on desktop, and you change the options in here between accent one, accent to x, background one and background to be exactly like this. So I prefer to remove the container desktop and instead of using a photo with a light background, maybe I use a photo with a dark background that will look good with that text in here, the white text in here. Okay? So if you go back in here to the overlay, we can maybe lower it a little bit. No, it looks worse actually. So we can do only this for now. Okay. This is unfortunate, but as I told you, these are the limitations you face when you work with a free theme. Unless you can do some coding and you can change the colors in here, you need to stick with what you have. If you click here on image banner, as I told you, you can change now. Okay? Now below this section, which is this whole section, we have the elements, okay? So this is the section and these are the blocks. You can hide. The blocks. You can remove them if you wish, like from here, or you can keep all of them. In this section, as I told you before, you need to put your most important idea, what your brand is about your customer's land on your store. So this is the place where they will decide where to go or if they like your brand. So make sure that in this section you included your unique selling proposition. So in my case, I sell organic skin care for children. He had, instead of putting this, I would put, for example, organic, 100% clean, clean, and under it I will put in the slogan, for example, choose the best for your little ones. Okay, so these are my heading and my subheading. Subheading, I have a very clear call to action, which is to shop. Now, I can change the subtitle in here and make it bigger or make it uppercase if I was in here, okay. I will keep it as this because I think this is how it looks the best. And I have in here the button that should leads to either my boss started collection or to all my products or to all my collections at depend if you have a very big catalog. I prefer if you make it link to your collection list. If you have a small catalog, you can link directly to all of your products. Okay, So this is the first section in here, and this is how far you can go with the image banner section on Don theme. In the next lecture where I show you the focal team, you will see the difference between the pit at pay theme, a professional team and the free themes and how far your customization can go with a paid. So after that we have Rich text. This is a section as I told you, if you've provided by default by Shopify, I usually prefer under this section to add some kind of social proof. So if your brand was mentioned in some magazines, or if some people talked about your brand, or if you have some kind of certifications, this is where you need to put them. For this, I usually use a section called Logo list. Let me see if we have this section that don't seem awfully so let me search for logo. I can't actually find that. I'm not sure what I can see the sections. I'm going to save and refresh, and click again on Add sections. Okay? So you can scroll in here to find or to see, check all the available sections. You can add any of these sections and if you wish All of them to your homepage. But in my case, I would like to have their logo list. So what do we have in here? We have block boss, we have colored collage for photos, we have collapsible content. So this is tabs. We have collection list, contact form, custom liquid, mason app featured collection, featured product image banner, which is the one we have used. Image with text. We are going to see it multi column, page, rich text, Slideshow and Video. So the options are pretty limited. I don't have even a logo, a list. I will try to see if I can use the multi column section instead of it. The idea is to have something similar. Let me see if they have it in here. The idea is to have, no, They don't. Let's go to another brand. So let's go, for example, to this brand to see if they have it. So the idea is to have, hopefully you will see the section somewhere. It's like it's S in collection as thin-section. So let me see if they have it in here somewhere. Yeah. The idea is to have a section similar to this one, okay, Usually if you are using a professional theme, you will have a section called Logo list or something like that that you can use. So I will try to recreate this using the columns section in here. I will see, I don't promise to you. Okay. I'm gonna remove this because it seems I already have one. I'm going to simply drag it like this and drop it. As you can see, I can simply move it like this. Or if you are using, activate a specter, like in here, you can, whenever you hover over a section like this, add a new section, okay? So you click in here when you have the plastic click on plus to add a new section or add a block. Remember, this is the sections and these are the blocks, the ones below it. Okay, I'm gonna move this one above that. It's text actually. I will see if I can put a title for it. Yeah. Let's put in okay. Let's I'm centered the text. It seems that I can send it the text. This is that mobile layout. I can center the text. I would love to be able to center the text. Let's keep it as it is because this is what we have. Let's see if we can add small images. Yes, we can do so. Let's download these images simply and try to copy them. So I can't. Let me go in here. Search for example, for, for example, Vogue logo. But for four, please don't invent these. Makes sure that you are using authentic. Authentic reviews, okay, we don't want to spam people. We just want to show the things we already like, the things that I would own. Social proof, social proof. So I'm going to select the logo I've just downloaded. I'm going to go to downloads. Okay? So this is acceptable. Let me remove all of this content in here and have only the image. This is not the perfect case scenario honestly, but since this is the method, the options of these themes, themes are limited. So we are trying to play around with what we have as much as possible to get the best out of this theme without doing any coding for sure. Okay, and now I will do the same in here, remove everything at the logo. Okay, let's add another column to see what we will have. Oaky, and that's it. So in here we have three columns and the fourth is on the other line. Let me see if I can put four. Yes, I can go up to six, I guess. Okay. So this is not the perfect case scenario, to be honest, but this is acceptable. For now. I would have loved if I can move this SCN in here to them and they let me see if I can do anything about it one more time. This is to change the image size. So yeah, this is not perfect. But let's skip this for now. Okay. Okay. So this is their second section. After that, usually I like to put directly my best sellers products. So I'm going to in here to click on Add section. And this time I'm going to add a collection, which is a featured collection section. I should have it in here. So it's in here. I will move it up here. And I should choose my best edited collection to fill in here. So I would put in here, check out the sellers. Okay. Select. Okay. Let me see if I can send that text. Okay. Okay. I can center the text. This is funny. Okay. What else I can do? I can add, I can change the number of products shown. I can change the number of columns on desktop and so on. So I can't, unfortunately, I can send it with the x. I don't have this option even with the most updated Don't theme version, so I need to stick with it. I can add a description if I wish, but I'm not gonna do that. I have products in here. I can make the products full-width, but I don't see any big difference in here. You can add, if you are a solid bottom, if you have multiple products in here and they fill out the first line so you can add if you All button, I definitely recommend you to do that. You can change any other colors if you wish, of the section, I usually like to do that. I usually like to have sections and different colors so people can stay consistent with me while checking and watching and seeing the homepage. So you can add this one, change this accent or change to this accent. I like this one. Actually, it looks nice. Okay, after that, we have, for example, this rich text section. You can use it in here to talk about your products or your brands. So for example, in here you can put something like power for clean, Let's say organic. And in the description here you can put, for example, the best skin care products for your little ones. We provide. We we can add something like, for example, our products will help you keep your kids. Keep your kids safe. And sound for sure. If I'm creating this page, I would take much more time into thinking about what I'm going to put in here. But the most important thing is to focus mainly on the benefits of the brand, of what makes your brand different. It shouldn't be possible to change the color accent for this section. You can do it, but since I already changed the color accent for this section, I'm gonna keep this as white. Or I can move this up, for example in here below the multi column section. And I can, I should be able to add padding. Yes, in here, I can add padding. Padding, is there whitespace to add below this section? I will make it 40 as per the top, so it looks better. Okay. After that it is not. I prefer to be in here. Okay. This is also another featured collection. This is actually it looks better than this one because it has multiple products. So let me, instead of choosing the best seller, choose another one to give you a better feeling about how this is going to look. So let me choose skincare. Maybe. It seems all my yeah, this one is fine. Okay. So let me remove this section in here. I'm going to click on Remove. I will also remove this one. I'm not using it. And what else we have AKI, so this is that it's text. After that, I can add my collection lists, so I'm going to click on Add section and I will add the collection list. Okay? So for the first collection, I will select, for example, my cream collection. Then for this one, I will select another collection. For this one, I will select this one for the title I would put in here, shock by collections. And you can check all the options in here. So you have the heading size, the image ratio, the number of columns on desktop, background accent. If you want to change this for example, or if you want to keep it wide, you can do that. Okay? And you can enable of you all as well. And in here you chose how this is going to look on mobile. So if we move to the mobile preview in here, this is how it's going to look on mobile. Let's see if we choose this one. What you will get, will get the scrolling feature. I guess this is better on mobile because it's small, friendly user to see their collections one after the other unless you have so many collections. And it's better than to use this option. Okay, going back in here, you can add also, you must add also another section about your brand. For this, you can, for example, use the image with text sections. So let me save. First. You can use the image with text section. So you add, for example, an image of you or behind the scene image. And you talk about your brand and your link to your About Us page. So let's me go, for example, to the image with text section. Okay? So for the image you can choose an image related to your brand. I prefer it if it's, for example, your team image or an image about your suppliers, anything that's related to your brand. Let's say, for example, I'm not going to choose one of these. Let's say I'm choosing this one which is not really that I fought for displacement. But let's say I chose this photo in here. Okay, in this section in here, I need to fill the information. And the button, for example, could lead to learn more about us. And in here you link to it About Us page on the pages you link to the About Us page. We're going to create the About Us page yet to link to it, but this is how you do it. And after that, you can have the sign-up that newsletter sign-up form. So you can have this one. You can change the color. Let me choose, for example, accent, one. We didn't use it yet somewhere else. So I have everything in here. Okay. Going back in here, you have the footer. The footer is where you put your links. So we have talked about the navigation when it comes to Footer, before, you click in here, you can change a color. You can, um, make it change the titles. You can change their menu. There are linking to. So under each of these you can link to a different menu as you can see. And you can remove these if you wish or hide them with the same logic we have done for the other sections. Okay. The footer is also a section that's common between all of your pages. So you do it once and that's it. This is to how we created this page using the dawn theme. So that's it for this lecture and the next section, I'm going to show you how to do the same work. But this time we are going to use the focal theme, which is a paid team. I highly recommend it's one of my favorite themes effort. So stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 23. How To Customise Your Homepage Focal Theme - Shopify Online Store 2.0: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to see how to create your homepage using a professional team. And as an example, we are going to use the focal theme. As you can see, I have downloaded the theme trials, so I didn't pay for the theme yet. It's just a trial. I will click here on Customize. You can publish the theme before buying it. So this is the only point and your work where you need to buy the same, it's one you decide to publish it. Here are the theme settings you can click and you can do the same work we have done with, I don't think. But first you can start by choosing changing things in their appearance. You can even change the theme style. So when check the foci theme demo store, let me go in there for color theme. You will see that they have four different styles. You can start by one of them directly. It doesn't matter. You can start with the one that looks the most like what you are looking for. So this is the second style. This is that third style. This is the first or fourth style. Sorry, I'm gonna pick the second, the third one actually. So I'm gonna go with chords and I would click on Change Style and safe. Okay, with the same logic, we are going to do the same thing, but this time using this theme, going to Appearance first, we can change the icon thick, thickness, that button, border-radius, the block border raises their vertical spacing, so on. These are very general settings. You can keep them for later. Let's go to colors and this is where we have worked before, and I don't think this is the main background color, this is the secondary color. I'm going to keep them as they are. Here. You have the colors for the success message and the error. I'm going also to match that these with my brand colors for the success, I'm going to use the green one. So I'm going to click in here, click on the green face that hex. For the error, I'm going to use my strongest colors, which is strongest color, which is the orange. Okay? Now for the header in here, you can precise the colors from now, or you can wait until you're changing the header and you move down in here. And from here you can click on theme settings and change the sex section that's related directly to the header section of the team. Either you change them directly from here, from the colors. All you wait until you change each of the sections and you change the colors. I'm gonna keep these for now. I'm not going to play around with them because we are going to modify them as you work on dissections one after the other. Let me go to the topography. And now as you can see, I have the topography of the heading and the topography of the body. For the heading, I'm going to choose lobster like we have done before. Okay. They're heading size, I'm gonna make it large, but I'm not going to use uppercase. I'm going to use normal. Okay? For this one, I'm going to change it to our selected color. As you can see, this is very, very similar to what we have done before. Okay, You can also change that color text if you wish, size so it can make it bigger if you wish. Okay, now, heading to the Announcement bar, which is the first section in here, I'm going to change this background to match our blue colors. So we're going to copy the hex from here and paste it in here. Okay, the first thing I'm going to announce is that I offer free shipping on all domestic orders. Free shipping on orders. Okay. In here you can have a text. So if you have a button, you can have a text, you can add an image, you can add more details, links and so on. I'm not gonna do that. You can also add another message this time. And as you can see, and I don't think the passages where like collapsing one after the other, stacking one after the other. Now we have these arrows to move from one announcement to another. Let me make this free. So the second announcement could be 100% return free or something like that. Okay, so in here you need to announce your most important information. So for example, maybe you are doing 20 per cent of all of all products. And you call your name, they said maybe it's some mercy. So I'm going to start like this. Summer sale. Maybe put in here a fire or maybe stars to make people notice this. Okay, and that's it. You can, for example, if you are doing the same on one collection linked to this collection in here. When you go to the Announcement bar in here to change the settings of the whole announcement bar. So you have this position, you can have it sticky. So if I scroll like this, it's still in there. Or you can have it like this which is non-sticky or you can have it sticky on mobile only or sticky every wet, I'm gonna make it non-sticky. I'm going to the we have the pop-up option in here. So if you want to have your pop up from Shopify directly, not choosing another software, you can have your pop-up. However, later through this course, I'm gonna show you how to use a software called clavicle to create your email marketing system. And I'm going to show you how to use the pop-up from Clavier. Just disregard this section in here. You can also use it if you wish, and link it to a crop view. Now go into the header section, which is the section in here. We need to add the logos. I'm going to select a logo. We are going to change the image width. And as you can see, for example, for this team, we can change the width for more by then for desktop so we can make it bigger on mobile and smaller on desktop, which is amazing because mobile and desktop has different, let's say layout. They perform in different ways. For the navigation, we have this and we have the main menu. Okay? You can select another menu for my book, for them abide, which is totally different than the menu for the, for the desktop, which is also very nice. So if, for example, in your mobile menu, you want only to mention the most important two elections to make your stored user experience better. You can do that. I would keep the same menu, so it's going to be the main menu for now. Okay, You can change the position same way. Put it on the left. I'm going to keep the logo left, navigation centered. This is my favorite. You can show icons, you can reduce padding. Padding is a few words. And in here, you can add these if you wish. At countries I don't like transparent header, but this is a section where you can allow transplant untethered. I don't like it. You can do it. I believe when you do it that everything is not readable, is not legible. So I prefer to not use this option in here you can for the search, instead of having a default search bar box have like a menu for the search, okay? So when they click on the search, they see a certain menu. So as you can see, this is different from what you have seen and that don't. And in later, and this, previously in this course, actually we have used a mega menus, as you can see. Now, I have the mega menus in here and they appear on mobile as well. So if I go in here, skincare, I can see them. Okay, so these are the other options from here. Now, if I want to change the color of the header instead of white, either you continue scrolling until the end and you click on theme settings so you scroll in here, you can change the text color. I'm gonna make it our blue. So this is the one I guess. Yes, to be consistent, I'm making it blue. You can see the background color of this header. I don't like to do that, but you can do it. You can change it. You can also change the icon thickness. You can choose the card drove a car type. So if you want to draw it, you can have the driver which is recommended. You can have it message or you can have it page. I will show you later what these are. But drawback is when you click on an item to add to cart and you see a driver coming from the right or from the top. It's usually very good for user experience. You can change the cart. I can add an icon in here. I'm not sure why it's not a building. Maybe because I don't have any item in the cart. So we will do we will check it later when I add something to cart, then you have the heading style and you have items. Show last, and that's it. Okay, So this is the header section. And when you add in here changing everything related to that, a general theme settings related to the header section. Okay, Now after header you have the cartilage rubber, which is this Robert I told you about. You can in here change the settings in here. We will check it out when we have the production on the homepage and we can add a product to cart and see how this is going to look. As with a team, everything you see in here is common between all pages. Same for this section in here that footage, everything in between is related to this special page which says the homepage. So starting with that first section and here we have the slideshow. It's when we show several pages, one after the other. I don't like is really to have slideshows. I prefer to have one image so I can use the image banner with banner or something like that. So as you can see compared to the team, this team has so many other sections that don't team didn't have. As you can see, we have so many sections to choose from. Let me check concerning images. I have imaged with dogs, image with textbook or image with text overlay. I guess this is the one I will use for. This is the one I would use for the main section in here if I don't want to use the slideshow. So I'm going to move it up in here. And I will. Hide this one. And I would choose in here to select my image, which was this image. In here. We can change the sub heading, the heading tags, everything. Let me add a Shop Now button and this button lead to all products for now. Okay, You can change the style to have it as a button or the simple link. I will have it as a button. Medium, texts position. Let me put it middle left. Okay. Now you can change in here as you can see the color texts for this section. And this is amazing because it means I can modify this section of precisely without the need to modify everything on my store. I'm going in here to choose my blue. For the button background, I would bookmark, pick my orange. And for the button tags I will chose also my blue. And for the overlay, I can choose the blue and the white actually, but I'm going to remove the overlay totally because I know I can see now everything. Okay. And everything in here is adjustable. You just go to this section and you write your information in here and you will have everything in here. If you want to have these texts, for example, broke into two lines. So you can go in here, click Shift and Enter. One second. If you click on the enter like this, you will have a lot of spaces. But if you go and click Control and Enter actually or Shift and Enter, Shift and Enter, you will have them into two separate lines, but without having spacing between them. So as you can see with this section, for example, the amount of customizations that we could reach with Don theme is way fewer than what we can do with a professional theme, like a focusing. I could do everything and he changed everything. That colors, the buttons, Everything. Okay, So in my opinion, this is amazing. And if you go to the theme settings, for example, if you've got two colors and you want to change something else about your primary button, for example, you can change all your buttons in here. So if I want the orange background to be for all my primary buttons, I can do in here, do the same in here for the text. And for the secondary button, I can keep the blue with a white text. Okay, So this will be applied, applied to all of my buttons. But still I can modify this button alone by itself without modifying all the buttons and my store, usually I recommend you to keep the same. Button. Styles are overused stored. This is way better for user experience and to keep your store feeding consistent. Now after this, we have the slideshow I have had hidden this section. I'm not going to use it, but with the same logic you gotten here, you change the blogs, you fill in the images. You can also have a different image for mobile. I'm not pretty sure if we have this option with this section or we don't have it. So if your image doesn't look good on mobile, you can use a slideshow section instead, you remove the second slide like this, you keep only one slide and in this case, you can have an image uploaded for that, for the desktop. And you can have another image, totally different image for them or by, let me show you. So when I go to the mobile, I have a different image. You can do that if you want to make sure that your image look good in both. If you have an image that doesn't look good in both, actually in both devices and on desktop and on mobile. You can use the slide so section and have only one slide and have an image for the mobile and then other image for the, for the desktop. Okay, you can do that definitely. I'm gonna remove this. As you can see, this is an option that we didn't have and I don't see him. Now, let me go back to the desktop view. So after this we have in here that are featured collection. I'm going to do something else. I'm gonna do the localist section I have told you about. I'm not pretty sure it's in here. So I'm going to edit. So you click here on Add section. And this time I'm going to search for the logo list. So it should be here. So this is the one. Okay, I'm gonna move it up in here under this section. And as you can see, it comes exactly as I wanted. It has a replacement for each logo like this. You can even add a link, you go to the next one, you select the logo. It has the exact job. I'm I'm looking for it, but for the team and the two play around in order to create a similar section to this one, I'm going to remove the remaining blocks and only keep these three. Okay, now for this section, if I want to change the background color, I can do that. I can click in here and make it, for example. Or I can make it blue, or I can make it orange. So as you can see, I can modify each section without the need to. Work with accents or with limited options I had with the dawn theme. Now, also, you can change the text color, the button color if you have everything, okay. You can also change in here, add subheadings and especially button for this section and so on. I'm gonna keep this white for now. Okay? That is also something that I want to know. If you don't want to enter your colors, your brand colors. Each time you are modifying the sections, you can create your brand kit and linked to add dynamically from here. So when you click on Connect dynamic source, this is one of the new options available after Shopify online store 2. You can click here on Edit brand and you can assign the colors for each of these colors. So when you click on primary colored in here, you are assigning the primary color for this section, but you can change these colors. So click on Edit brand. In here. Inside of the brand section, you can fill out your Blend brand logo, a square size of your logo, your colors, the cover image, that slogan, that sort description, and even your social media links. So Facebook, Instagram, Twitter and everything. This will help you to have the information directly in that instead of the need to fill them out each time, okay, So you can hear it. Click plus and add your colors. Okay, you need to put the contrasting color in here, which contrasts with this one. So it's gonna be used for the text most probably same for the secondary column, a color and so on. I don't use this yet. I still think it's much more comfortable to me to change colors in here by myself. But if you think that this is a good option for you, you can use it. It's, it's a new option and it's meant to make your work easier. But I'm still not using using it that much. I said prefer to have direct control over each of the sections I have on my store when it comes to colors specialty. So after their logo list, the second section I'm going to introduce is the best seller section. In here you can add multiple featured collections. I will start by adding my first one, which is the most important one to me and it is the best seller. So I'm going to link to my best data collection like this. This is my bedside look best seller I can in here at the title, for example, our all-time favorite. Or for example, shout our all-time favorite. You can add other sections are the collections if you wish, but I prefer to only have the best data collection in here to highlight the section. You can also change the background color like this, or you can keep it wide. It's up to you. But as I said before, I prefer to have like different colors in this section. So somewhat so the person can still scroll, see the sections. Understand when I say section starts and when it ends. Okay, So let me give this section the blue color like this. Moving down, we can start creating the same, the homepage with the same logic we had, we have done with, I don't think. But instead of that, I'm going to show you the different available sections in here so you get a feeling about how far you can go with a professional theme, like the focused theme, for example. Let me start with this first section. It's called image with text. And it allows you to add an image with a text and another image with another texts. When people choose between these different texts, the image will change as well. So if you go in here and you select, for example, this first image for that first text. You got in here, you select another image. So now when you scroll down in here, you have two different texts, two different images. This could be in a perfect section to talk about something special about your brand, or to show two different collections. Or maybe to talk about your brand history or mission, anything. But it's an amazing section actually. It looks very professional. It allows you to deliver information in a very good way. Now after this section, we have this section which is shoved a look and it's one of my favorite sections ever actually, in this section you can take a big photo like this one, for example, of all food products. I'm going to upload actually another one. So we don't have the same image twice. Let's see. I've added this one and you can take up to three different products inside of this section. So for example, I can move this when you click in here. So this is the first product. You can move the points location, as you can see in here. And tag a product. It is specific product and it does. I'm just trying to make it reach this product. I'm going to select a product, let's say this one. Okay, so now when I hover over this, I can see the product and they can directly add this product to cart. When I click on Add to Cart, I can see my product and cart. And I can see other products that I can add to cart as well. I can see how much is I send it to reach the free shipping and I can directly check out. This is amazing. This is something amazing. And if you go to the mobile view, this is, this still looks very good actually, it still looks very professional and very good and it is very user friendly. Okay, going back to the desktop view, so this is one of the sections that I like the most. It's amazing in order to increase your average order value by showing multiple products and allowing customers to actually add a product that costs directly from here without the need to go to the product page even on mobile view. If you go in here, for example, you click, you have that quick view in here and you can directly add to cart. Okay, So this section definitely was not available and they don't theme, you would never find this section and a free theme. I don t think so. And I don't even think you can find it an old pit teams. So if you want this section, make sure that while you are browsing for ethene for your sword, you make sure that they have this section in that demo starts. After that we have the blog posts. So this is a section showing your blog posts. It's anonymous session. You will find that in most of the, of the themes, you can modify it in here some of the specifications, and here you have image with black text. This is also another way to show your images with text. As you can see, you have multiple options. You have the image, that image with text overlay the image with text block. You have the two images section that we have seen before and so on. After that you have the collection, Let's, which is a collage sewing multiple collections at the same time. You have this nice testimony in section where you can include testimonials of your customers. And we have this timeline. The timeline is very nice actually to tell a story about your brand. So you can show different things about your brand. Maybe you can talk in one section about your suppliers, how you prepare the products and packaging your behind the scenes and so on. It's a way, or maybe you can tell that I'm lying about how you created your brand. It's a very nice section to talk about your brand, I guess is the best place actually to talk about your brand, then you have the future, the product section. I usually don't use this unless I'm an R1 product store, so I'm going to hide it. Then you have this section which is text with icons. You can choose the icon from inherit if you wish, and the change that content. So if you're offered a free shipping customer service, these are amazing things to mention in the homepage. And finally, you have the newsletter in here for people to sign up. Also, same idea, you can change colors, content, everything. And if you click here on Add section, you will see that you can have a huge list of sections that you can add from. You have customized HTML, custom liquid, Frequently Asked Questions section, which is a very important section you can use this section definitely need product pages. You have so many images sections, multi column, press section. You can like try around and test these sections and see which ones are good for you and use that. As you have seen with a paid theme, you have so many options that you don't have with a free theme. And not only that, you can customize your theme in a way, and I'm much better way because you actually have potential of customizing everything without the need to do any coding. So if you are looking to customize your stored, if you want to make your store amazing, I highly recommend you to go with a PE team. Remember, this is something you pay once and that's it. So one life payments, it's a small investment that I highly recommend you to take. But still, if you don't have the money, you can go as, as I start by with a free theme, like Don't theme. And then this course, I'm going to show you how to use it and addition of showing you how to use a paid theme. So stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture where we are going to see how to work on your product pages using that don't fit statement. And let's meet in the next lecture. 24. How To Customise Your Collection Pages - Shopify Online Store 2.0: Hello there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture, we are going to see how to customize your collection pages. I have created some collections in here. If I go to products, I can find my collections in here. What I need to do now is to go to online store. And I'm gonna go to that. Don't aim to customize. From here. I need you to choose collections. To go to the default collection where the same logic for the collection pages. You can create different collection pages, templates, you can use metal fields. It's the same procedure we have used for the product pages. For the collection page, we have by default the announcement bar, the header, and the footer. These are the comments sections with all the other pitches. And here we have the collection banner, which is this part in here where we can see the collection name, their collection description. And if we have an image for the collection, we are going to see it here as well. And in here we can choose the color, background color of this section as well. So we can change the color if you wish. Okay, After that you have the product degrade. And this is the grid that shows our products, the products inside of this collection. We can change how many products you want to see per page. We can change the number of columns on desktop so we can have them too. For example, we can change the image ratio. We can show the second photo on hover, and this is important. We can show vendor, we can show product ratings. We can enable a Quick Add button which has a nice feature to allow customers to buy easily from you. Then we can enable filtering and cheese filter layout. These options will differ depending on the theme you are using. But for don't theme, we have the option to have the filter in here. And you can change the filter. The filters themselves. We are going to talk about filters in a later lecture. But this is where you can see your filters. So you can filter by price, you can filter by in stock or stock, or you can create your own festers. Okay. After that, we can also disable the fill. So I think if you wish, in here, you choose how this is going to look on mobile. So if I have this, I can have two products or I can have one column product. I think two columns products is fine because it shows multiple products in a smaller area. I guess the two columns layout as good, and it still looks good on mobile. It shows more products and sell the products look good. Let's see how the filtering actually looks on mobile. This is the filter. It's nice. It works fine. Now, if we move back to the desktop view, as we have noticed before, as with all the new pages on Shopify online store 2, now we can add new sections to their collection pages. You can add any of the sections that were available for the homepage or for the product page. With the same logic, you can also use metal fields. Let's say for example, we are working with this one image with text. For the image in here we can have a metal field, but this time, instead of creating a Meta field for products, we are going to create a method for collection. So let's click in here and let's click on Add Meta fields. This time we are going to the collection section and you are going to add the finishing. And we are going to name it collection image one for example. And we are going to give it the file type. And it's going to be an image. Now when I go to the collection pages, for example, for this one in here for the best seller, that is enumerator field, which is the collection image. Let me select one. Let's say this one. I will click on Save. Going back in here, I will save this. And in here for the photo exactly which is this one, I'm going to select the metaphase. So as you can see, this is the omega field I have created. Okay, you can do the same with the text, with the button content, with everything, okay, metaphase are here to help you out, customize it. You collected pages with the same logic you have used for your product pages. With the same logic when you want to assign a certain collection page to your collection, you go in here and you change was the theme template. We can create as much templates as you wish and you can link to them from here. While you're creating your collection pages, there are some things that you need to take care of, and this is one of the common questions I received. What should I include as information inside of my collection page? Well, is that a few collection page you need to tell your customers what makes this collection special? Why people would explore this collection? You don't need to write a lot of texts, but you can write a few paragraphs explaining what makes this exact collection better or what's the story behind this collection? What your customers will find inside of this collection. You can also include a photo for the collection. For example, the list of products if you wish. The filter in here is extremely important because this is what will improve the user experience, especially if you have a very big catalog. If you said a lot of products when people land on your store, it would be very confusing for them to filter your products. So you need to have filters in here to make their lives easier. Let's go back to the store to see if they have used the filters in here. When you go to the baby collection, which is a big collection, they have in here, the sort by bestseller and the price they have in here some sub-collections to choose from in order to make the browsing experience better. Let's scroll down. They don't have much filtering, which is something I look in the command. They don't have a lot of filtering, so this is not the perfect example for us. But still they have in years I'm a small sub-collections to help their customers. So this is h was a brand, a very famous one. And I guess they're filtering experience is one that we can learn from now taking out this shoes brand and here you can see that filters they have first a colorful feathers and they have their size filters. For sure is, these filters are extremely important because if I'm exploring this collection and I want to know if I can find a black shoes with my size. I can easily know that using that fitters. So that's it for this lecture. I hope that it will help you to create amazing collection pages for your stored. Stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 25. How To Customise Your Product Pages Dawn Theme - Shopify Online Store 2.0: Hello there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to see how to modify your product pages. I need you to watch this lecture carefully because product pages and how we modify them changed a lot after Shopify online store 2. So this is one of the most important lectures ever after Shopify online. So 2, now we can customize and modify product pages a totally different way than what you used to do before Shopify online store 2. So please watch this lecture carefully because it will greatly help you to create amazing product pages. And you must know that product pages, your product pages are the most important pages on your store. It's where people will make the decision whether to buy from you or not. So take good time watching this lecture, even re-watching it if you need it, make sure to create an amazing product page template for your products. What? We all know that to add a product, to go in here and you will find oil fuel products and you can click on Add a product. I know that this is basic, but I need you to stay with me. When you go to a product in Shopify, there are some inflammation that you can fill. This information are the title, the description, and then you have the images, you have the price, the inventory. If you have variance, you have to wait for shipping, so on. And in here you have the search engine optimisation section. This is what you have by default, okay? So for each product you can have a different title at the front description, the front photos, different pricing. All of these fields in here are dedicated and addressed for products only. This is what we used to have and this is what we use to work with. And inside of our product pages, we used to see these inflammation and that's it. Now, things are different. Now we can add new fields like this one. So instead of heading, having a title field, we can, for example, have a specification field. You will find it in here inside of this editor page and you can fill it, and it can be different from one product to another. Let me show you how to do that first so you can get a better feeling about what I'm talking about from your Shopify dashboard. Go to settings. From here, go to the section called Meta fields. Wet Meta fields are things we can create an ordered to add dynamic sections inside of our products. Stay with me. Going here, two products, because in this lecture we are going to see how to create a metaphor for the products. So you go to products and from here click on Add definition. And let's stick with the specifications metaphase examples. So I'm gonna call this specific applications. For the description, I'm going to keep this empty, but for the content type, I'm going to choose in here multi-line text, because first specifications I might have different ideas that I want to fill and so on. So I'm going to choose multi-line text. You can hear patrols about the minimum, maximum and regular expression, something like that. I'm not gonna do that. I'm going to click on Save. Then I want you to go back again. And this time I will be creating a new metaphase, but it's not gonna be a text. It's gonna be, for example, an image. Let's say I want to add a small image showing the sizes of my products. So in this case, I'm going to call this size. And for type, I'm going to choose phi. And under file in here I'm going to choose images. You can also add videos, but for this example, I'm going to choose images. Now, just to click in here to see the different options that you have. You can have a single line text, a multi-line text, and then triggered a decimal, a product. Maybe. We use this if you want to recommend a product and other products, I'm going to show you how to do that also, you have filed this is the one we use to the images. You have date, date, and time, weight, volume dimensions. This is product, product variant. Also I'm going to show you how to do that single line, multiline. You have colored rating to all fours and URL. Okay, Let's go back to our metaphysics. So we advocated to metaphase, one of them is image, which is this one and another one is specifications. If you recall. When you went to the product page before, we only had these fields to fit. Now, if we scroll down in here, we can see other fields that are in here. These are the fields we have created ourselves. The size, for example, I'm going to go to canva actually in here. I will add my product page, my product image, and I will add sizes just to show you an example. So going in here to this file, let's say I'm talking about this product. Although for this product size is not only, is not even a, something to stop at, but let's say I have this for example, I'm going to remove the background. I'm going to add dimensions. Let's see if we have something under dimensions in here. So maybe we can have an arrow or something to use this one. For example. Let me put it in here to make it bigger for sure. Try to create a better design design than this one. So I'm gonna put, for example, 30 centimeters. Let's say like this. Then I'm going to copy this. Please make your designs better than this one. It's not professional at all. I'm only using it as an example. And I'm going to put in here, for example, it's not even three. Let's put five by ten by seven, for example. But this is seven. And this is five centimeter. Okay, I will rotate this text. What I can do now is to download this image like this. I can click on downloads. I'm going to download this PNG on it, this one, not everything else. And I will upload it inside of my first metaphase. Going back in here, I will choose for this image, I will select an image and I will upload the image. So from here, I will choose this one. Then for the specifications. And here I would write my product specifications. So I would use the check mark like this. So I will put, for example, let's say vegan. I would put organic, Let's say perfect for sensitive skin or something like that. Perfect for sensitive skin. This is just an example, please in here, put another specifications on nearby that but the benefits also, and if it's a specification that should be like more number oriented about the materials, stuff like that. I'm going to click on Save. Now if you go to any of the products in here, any of them. So for example, this one, you will see these fields in here. So you can't, so you need to fill them. You can skip them if you wish, but you want them to show inside of your product page, you need to fill them in here. So let's go back to this product which is the face cream. And let me preview it to you, I guess now you will see that don t think preview, which is the basic one. Let's see it together for 1 second. So we have the title, we have the subtitle. We would see if we can change this. We have the price, we have the descriptions, these steps and some other sections. Let me now go to the customization tab to see how far I can customize this page. So from online store you go to themes to customize. Dear, I need you to go to product page. And you either start by modifying, modifying the default product page, or you can create a new template for you that you change. If you go in here, let's go back to Shopify in here. If you go to products, for example, for this one, we have told phase Shopify that the template for this page is the default product. But if we created a new template and we call it, for example, my initials, we can start this product based on the different product page and click on Create Template. Now we have created a totally different template for the product page. So if for example you have shoes and bags on your store, you can create a product page template that you use for your bags and another one that you use for your shoes. And each of these templates can be totally different. The only thing that you need to do is to go in here and to assign the right template to the right product. I'm going to refresh this page and assign that I template for this page. I'm going to assign my new template. In here, I'm changing only my new template. I'm not changing the default product page template. I'm changing my own template. So as you can see, with the same logic, we have changed the homepage, we are changing now the product page. So the first section we have in here is that product information. And then here you find the most common information about the products. But we used to have usually inside of the altarpiece by theme. So we have the images that title the price, everything else. When you start moving on between these blocks, you will start to see the difference. So for example, this first text is a metaphor that shows the vendor. If you want to show the vendor, I'm not going to include this. I'm going to simply remove it because I'm the only vendor. Okay, then you have the title which is this element, you can modify it. Then you have this text in here, which is the product subtitle in here. By default, they have linked to a product subtitle mega field, but you need to create this method we created before. So what we need to do is to add this product subtitle mega field to be able to display it in here, I'm going to click on add product, subtitle mega field. And I need to have the same name so it's product subtitle. Let me add in here the same name and click on Save. Now, when I go back to my products, and if I go back to the face cream for example, and I scroll down further, I have a product subtitle fit. Let's add, for example, perfect for sensitive skin. Click on Save. And I will be back in here, I will save this and refresh. So as you can see now, I can see my metal field in here and my subtitle mega field in here. This can be different from one product to another because each time I wanted to change the subtitle mega field, I just need to fill the subtitle in here. So if I go to another product, for example, for this one, I can go in here and fill totally different information in this section. Okay, going back in here, we have the price, you can change this. You have that variant picker. If you have variance, you can change how the variance look like or the pills or drop-downs. You have the quantity selector. You have the buttons are so not much, nothing much to do in here. You have a description. This is the same description you have in here inside of your product page. This is the information you fell directly in here. This is what we'll show in here. You can hide it from here if you wish, if you want to include that someone else, or you can move it like this. And I guess you can put it under one block. If you click here on Add block. Let's say you can add a collapsible row. Let's say if you can add the description. No, but you can add a dynamic Butterfield for the description and create a better fit for the description if you want to add description to be also collapsible. What you can do to just keep very short information in here like a small sentence and this section in here. And everything else you put inside of your tabs if you wish, or inside of the remaining sections of your pitch. Now going back this pair in here, by default you have the materials, you have the shipping and returns, you have the dimensions, and you have good instructions and the share button, wet foot, all of these information in here whenever you see the signs, it means that you can add a dynamic resource for this element. So if you don't want this to be material for everything, you can have something else you can link to a dynamic source and you can include this dynamic source in here and change this same for the content. You can create a dynamic source for the content of this tab. Same for this one, same for this one and same for this one. Let's say for example, for dimension, you want to include a size charts. So you can in here insert a text that links to a incident attacks with a link to your page. Okay? Well, in this theme in here, you don't have that option. Let's see if we can make this. Also. This one can be actually, can be actually dynamics. So if for example I want includes the size chart in here. So if I put size chart, Okay, I can make the pop up also a metaphase. So what I'm going to do is to click here on Connect dynamic source. And I'm going to create a dynamic source, but this time it's gonna be a link, a dynamic type. So I'm going to products. I will add a definition. This time I will call it size chart. And as a content, I will choose either file if you want to include a PDF or a, or a page, you a link to a page. So in this case you go down to in here to reference and choose page. Okay. So let's say for example, I've chosen a page, I will click on Save. I will go back in here to my pages. I will create a size chart, page 1 second, please. I will add a page, I will call it size chart. In here. I will add this table. For example. I prefer to honestly to use metal fields. It's ready to use PDFs. Pdf instead of using the tables provided by by Shopify. But it's fine. So let's say 28. It's nothing. Okay. It's just 129 to something like that. And I click on Save. What I do now is I'm going to buy products. I'm going to the product I'm working on. And inside of the metaphase size chart, I'm gonna link to this page, so I'm going to choose the stage. This means that for each of my product I can choose a different size chart page. Now I am going to click on Save. I will try to add the dynamic source in here. This is the dynamic source and I will click on Connect. Now when I click, I see the page I've just created. It's not loading properly. I'm not sure why. Let's preview the page in here. Let me save again to see why it's not appearing now in here. Okay, So I just needed to save. So as you can see, this actually is good if you have different size charts for your products. So you can link to each one of them in here. Same for everything happening here. Whenever you see this sign, it means it can be dynamic. You can make it different from a product to another. Okay, this is the power of Shopify online store 2. Now we can add dynamic sections other than the wording products and titled sections, even in here and the remaining of the pages, you can add sections like for example in here, you can add images of people wearing or using your products as you can lacked a dynamic source for these images, same for the text in here, you can do the same. You can select a dynamic source for each of your texts and so on. In here inside of this page, you can add as many sections as you wish using these features in here. So as you can see, you can add as many sections in here depending on the theme you are using. If you go to the demo store of this theme actually. So if we go to the demo store, Let's go to this product page, for example, if you scroll down, you can see the sections they have, but this is very basic. You can have even more and more sections. Now, let's go back for 1 second to here. And this time I want to show you how we are going to use the specification. Let's see what, what kind of man that means we have created. Let's see how to use the size and the specifications metaphase. So going back in here, Let's see, let's say for this image, I'm going to, for the image, I'm going to choose a metal field. So I'm going to click in here. And I will choose this as mid-field. And for the text, the heading, it's the heading for the text I'm going to choose. For example, my specifications with aphids went out. Whenever I fill this information for a product, they will be different from one page to another. As you can see, I can make everything about this section dynamic, which means using, I can use them with aphids for everything, for the heading, for the title, for everything else. You can even have a static parts. So for example, I can add the Meta field after this text. So if I link now to emit a field, for example, products updated, it will show like this. So if you have a text that you want to have for all of your products, but a special part of the text that you want to be specific vote a product. You can do that. Okay? When you go, for example, to this section also which is a multi column section, you can see that most of the elements are dynamic, even the button label. So for example, if I want to link in here to two different products, I want to increase my average order value. So I want to suggest related products to this product. What I can do is that first first step, for example, I can suggest this product like this, but I can this instead of making it the same for all my, all of my products, I will create a metaphor for this. So I will create in here a Meta fields and why we call it product recommendation one, for example. So it's under products at definition. One. I will create multiple ones. The first one is going to be an image because this is the image of the products. So it's gonna be an image. Then I will create the link. So I'm going to add a definition product recommendation one link. And I'm going to adhere to is under reference. I'm going to choose product and I will click on Save. Okay, you can do the same for the second product recommendations. Now you go to products and you go to face cream. You scroll down. And for example, my first recommended product is going to be this one. My link. It's gonna be for this one. Going back in here, I will choose a dynamic metaphase, which is this one. And for the link labeled, for the link itself, I'm going to choose. I'm actually not being able to see it in here. Let me save if it's not gonna work. So most probably we are going to need to create another type of metal fields. So going back in here, we go back to mete fields, products. Let's try link instead. So product recommendation one link. Okay, let's correct link to because we already took this name. So this time, let's choose. You add Allan stat, and click on Save. I'm not pretty sure why this didn't work properly. It should have worked. No dynamics or is that available? Okay. Let's try now. If we go to in here, let me copy the product link. Let's see if now I can link to it. Okay, Yeah, It should have been a UI that okay. So the link labeled could be, for example, check this product or something like that. You can add a text related to this product, a title for this product. Make this all matter fields. Well, if you are using a professional team, usually they come with the product recommendation sections that look way better than this. I'm going to show you in the next lecture how the focal team does that. Just stay with me. I'm just trying to give you something similar to what you can get with a professional theme using the free theme, which is that don't think so. Yeah, you can, for example, in here. Hey, our serum, you can also make this dynamic recall for it's gonna be different from my product to another. Because for example, if this is the page where you are selling a candle, you want to recommend that charter for the candle. But if this is the page you are selling an iPhone, you want to recommend that charges of the iPhone. That's why all of these should be dynamic, same for the year, let's say per pair this product with another product, you have checklists, this product, and you have your first product recommendations. You can even name this, for example, by you with or best used with and so on. As I told you that this is not the perfect way to recommend a product, but this is one way to do it with a team because this is not an option That's by default. We have by default. You can do the same thing you have done with the homepage, adding as much sections as Jewish and making them dynamic and different from one product to another. Remember when you go in here to metaphase, you have a wide range of metal field types that you can use. So under products you have all of these types that you can explore and use depending on what you want to show. It's out of your product page. Okay. Now, concerning the other types, those other types are used and the different pages. So you have metaphase for pages, you have metaphase for collections, for variance, for customers, for blog posts and so on. Okay, that's it for mainly this lecture and the next lecture, I'm going to show you how to modify your product page using the focal theme. And you're going to see the huge difference you will find between a free theme like they don't theme and a more professional theme like the theme. So stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 26. How To Customise Your Product Page Focal Theme - Shopify Online Store 2.0: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. In this lecture I'm going to show you how to modify your product pages using a professional theme, like the focal theme for example. So this time instead of going through that Don't theme, we are going to click on Customize the focal theme. And from here we are going to the product page. The only problem is that when your theme is not published, you can see the templates from the Shopify editor so you can assign the templates to your products unless the theme is published, okay, so we need to see them in here in the preview. That's why I'm gonna go to that default product and I'm going to modify the default product pitch. So the theme product page has a different structure than the theme. This is obvious, but there are so many things in common, but definitely this one provides much more advanced options. Well, the first thing I noticed is that I need to change the Add to Cart color because it doesn't contrast with my background. So I'm going to click in here on product page, clicking on theme settings. And instead of having this as a background, I'm going to pick maybe the green. Yeah. Okay. I can even pick the blue and depends, but I need a light color. Okay, So under this section, I have in here, when you click, you can see the options that you can change. You can show, for example, a product rating. You can select the help page and you can even make this page dynamics. We can have emitter feed linking to this page as we have seen in the previous lecture. You can in here change things about media. So for example, you can show thumbnails on mobile, mobile short-term needs on the left-hand side on the button and make the transition phase. So now that transition is slide when I move from one page to another, I can make it fade when I move from one page to another. Or getting addition to all of these different options. Different options. You can add more blocks so you can add the description, you can add inventories, you can add text, image, another button, custom liquid line item property. And this is it. I'm going to start with a description. So for example, for the description, this is the default description that you put inside of your editor in here. If you go back, let me close all of this honestly. So if you go back to Shopify in here, this is the description we are talking about. This is the description we are seeing in here. Okay? But I can add a text and I can make it dynamic. If for example, instead of having the text, I want to have the specifications. So I can have my bullet points in here. Instead of having it in here, I will need to move to the product we have worked on, which is the face cream because this is the product we use to fill in the information. So let me go to the homepage and try to find the product itself. Okay? I will search for it instead. So I'm going to put cream. Okay? So as you can see, I have linked in here and inside of this text to my specifications, and I have them in here. So if you want to add bullet points in this section, this is a nice place to do so to like mentioned, the most important ideas about your products, the most important benefits that your customers can get out of your products. And your description can be somewhere else, maybe in here and that button. Okay, so you can also add other blocks if you wish. But for me this is quiet, very good. Having their main benefits in here is very important. We can also add a custom liquid if you add a little bit familiar or if you want to add an image, for example, showing you were unique selling propositions, you can do that. You can add, for example, a image showing you specific certifications like and have it placed in here. For example. It can be an image with multiple certifications at the same time. You can have it in here above the buy button to make, to add social proof and to encourage people to buy from you. Let's see if we can see it somewhat. To understand more what I'm talking about. Let's see if we can find something similar in this store. Let's say I want to include something like this. I'm going to print screen this for the sake of example. And I'm going back in here to my product page. And this time I'm going to change this and upload the picture I just screenshotted. So it's in here actually. And I have now this picture, okay, I can make it larger like this for short, it should be a better resolution. So once you're finished with this section, I just really liked to make the photos. And the photo sizes are the same size at this one. So you can make your photos vertical in order to have, let's say, a cleaner layout so you can have your photos vertical to fill out this whole space at least. And to be, let's say, have an equilibrium between the section that photos in here and attacks in here. Okay, I'm using any other like squarish photos, but for sure you can use different sizes. If you go back in here, just let's make sure that the theme supports vertical photos. So I'm going back to downloads. And let's see if I have any vertical photo. Let's say this one. I'm gonna put it first and see what will happen here. As you can see, it fits exactly the image, the image size. So if you want to have like a clean layout, I prefer if you use a vertical, vertical images sizes. So you have them in here, okay? They would be like sleek, very elegant. The layout will look more professional. Okay, After the next section in here, you will find other sections in here and they're focused team. You can have a list of tabs, one after the other. So first you have your description, which is the default tab. When you add another tab, for example, you call it, you can add any views. For example, this is a default one. As you can see, they become tabs. You can also add your own content tab and you can make everything matter fields. So just as an example, I'm using different methods. I have say something like this. As you can see, I have these tabs in here. Let me go back. So as you can see, I have these tabs in here and I can make them dynamic, okay? Also you can add in here a featured products section. This is what I have told you about. So instead of playing around with this, you would be recommending a product by itself in here. So in here you would select a product and you would put it in here for the featured products section. Okay, let's click on Add a mega field. Let's go to products. Let's add a definition. Let's call it recommended one. And in here, I guess it should be a product metaphase type. Let's see if there is something else. Yeah, I guess it should be a product metaphase types. So let's go to product list of products and click on Save because I guess in this list you would recommend to the products at the same time. So I'm going back to products. This is one of them bad things about battlefields. Whenever you are working on a theme, they don't precise exactly the time of metta fields you should be creating. So you need to guess what type works. I guess later on in the future they would be doing that for you or telling you which type exactly works for displacement. But for now, that's what we have in here. I need to select a list of my products. Let's say this one and this one, I will click on Add and click on Save. Let's go back in here, save and try to refresh to see if this time I still not in that I left the page actually. Let me go back in here to customize. Let's go to the serum products that are to the cream product directly because this is a product we have been working on. So going back in here to the featured product, let's click on select products just for 1 second. Can you see them but I don't want them to be fixed. I want them to be dynamics. So I need to click on Change products. And I need to, I need to click here on chose. A metaphysics is gonna be the recommended one. As you can see, I needed to add first products like normal products in order to be able to see my metal filled in here, I guess the bug, but it's fine. You can do the same thing as I have done, and you click on Connect. So now these two products recommended in here are dynamic. This means that I can recommend different products, different products for different, for each of my products. So for example, for that, for this product, I recommend that these tool for another product, I would recommend totally, totally different products. This is something very nice. And when you click here on Add to cart, the product will be directly added to cart. With the same logic. You can add as many sections as you wish in here. And then this is quiet big so you can choose any of the sections and most of them will have dynamic elements inside of them so it can make them product unique sections. So for example, this one in here, everything can be dynamic. As you can see, you can create a mega field for each of these items and have unique product sections inside of your stored. Okay. So this is it for how you modify your products after online store 2 and the next lecture I'm going to show you how to create product page templates and how to assign the different templates for your products. And I'm going to show you how to delete a product page template if you don't want to do that anymore. Okay, So stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 27. How To Customise Your Pages - Shopify Online Store 2.0: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to talk about pages and how you can profit from Shopify online. So 2, to create better pages for your online store. So the pages you create to find that under online store pages. And let's say I'm going to create, for example, a page for showing that my team members. So it's gonna be our team. What I'm doing currently is to keep this page as it is and to fill all the information within the page template because in my opinion, inside of the page template, you can design better pages. Go in here to online store. And from here I'm going to click on Customize. We are still using that don't seem as an example, but you can do the same thing with any theme you are using. From here, go to pages and pages in here to create a new template. And this time we are going to call it our team page. I'm gonna give it the default page template as a base point. And I will create on Create template, and I will click on Create template. So this is my page template and as you can see, it is empty because inside of my page, I don't actually have any. Just let me go back to show you because I didn't feel any information inside of the production of the page itself. So if you've gotten here to our team, that page is empty. Now I will start adding sections inside of this, this, this speed. And then when I finished it, I will assign this template to this page like this. Okay, going back in here, so inside of this page, I will add a small text, for example, talking about our teams. So the first section I will use is going to be rich text. Here. I might not use the buttons, so maybe I will remove this block and I would keep these two. I will align them to the left, for example, if I wish. And I will align the whole content also to the left. Okay? You can keep it centered if you wish. Take this or you can do it to the left and even remove the page title from here. So like this. Okay, So you talk about your theme in here. Maybe you want to introduce your different team members. So maybe you can use, for example, the codon section, that multi column section in here. You add a photo of each of your team members in here. And below it, you add a text about this team member, about their contribution to rebrand and so on. So you create this in here, you fill out all the information you click on Save. Then when you go to preview this page, let's click here on view this page. It will have the same exact layout. So as you can see, this is the layout I have created. You can do the same to create all of your pages. The About Us page, the contact us page, Meet the Team page. Maybe if you have a mission, maybe if you have some charity work, maybe if you want to create a wholesale page, you do all of that using page templates. You're going to create as much page templates as you wish and fill in all the information within that customizing, customization editor in here, you can do the same for all of your pages, for your about us page for me, the theme or four for the wholesale page, or maybe for the Contact Us page. You can do exactly the same thing. Create a page template and assign the template to an exact page in here. Now the only thing I need to do is to go to navigation in here, click on Main Menu and link to my new page inside of my main menu. For example, let's meet the team. For example. In here, you link to the page so it's under pages. It's our team, click Add. And let's see the menu. Now, if we refresh this page in here, if you go to the homepage, let's refresh it for 1 second. Why it's not showing exactly. I've made flesh it one more time. Maybe go from here to preview. So it's in here, the team, when you click on it, you are Moving to the page which is the team page. So as you can see, you can create as many pages as you wish. And also you can, instead of having one of them like this, you can add a menu with some venues, for example, about us and the About Us menu has all the About Us link. So you will have the team that I bought a section that's totally behind the brand and so on. The point of doing that is that using the customization here, the Page Builder in here, you can design better pages instead of having the boring, normal pages we used to have because the default, default page look like this. It's a default page. It doesn't have anything inside of it. But with the templates we create, we can go to a very different level by adding sections, adding photos, making the page layout perfect when you add the content inside of the page directly from Shopify. So if either content from here, you don't have a lot of control over how it's gonna look inside of the page. So you can add text in here, add images, but you can't actually modify the layout that much. But when you use the editor itself, you can create amazing pages using it. So that's it for this lecture. I hope it will help you to create amazing pages. Stay tune with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 28. How To Use Page Templates - Shopify Online Store 2.0: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. In this lecture we are going to talk about page templates and we are going to take the product page as an example so you can understand how product pages templates work and how we can use them. So from here, I want you to go to customize. But you must be doing this for the theme you are currently using. Because if you created a template on a theme that you are not using, you can see it inside of your product page, editor. Inside of the team in here, what I'm going to do is to click here on products. And as you can see in here, I can choose between using the default product page or using a template that I have created already creating a new template. And when you click on create a template, you can choose the name first. So let's say this is our S product number two. And then here you can decide how you are going, what layout you are going to use as a starting point. So are you going to the default product page template or the product page template you have worked on. So let's say I'm going to use this one and I will click on Create template. So now I have to take place actually three templates for my product pages. I have the default one, I have the two, and I have this one. Let's say for example, I am inside of the main one. I'm going to do something that's very different. So you can see the difference between the two templates. Let's say for this one I'm going to hide the description. And I will click on Save. And for the other one which has the product to, I'm gonna keep their description in here. I'm going to now go back to my Shopify editor. And for products in here, when you click on the product, either that you can choose in here, what template you are going to use for this product. I'm going to use this template. Now I'm going to preview this so you can see it. So this is the product page without a description because I have chosen the first template. Now let me go back to my Shopify dashboard and let me assign the different, the other template. Now let me go back to my Shopify dashboard and assign the other template to another page. So going back in here. So going back in here, I'm going to products as well. And this time I'm going to this one. And under this one I would choose the product too. And I will click on Save. And finally, I will preview this product. As you can see now I have the description in here, so I can have two or maybe three or as many as you wish product page templates. This could be very valuable. For example, on the same store, you sell cushions and you sell kits, and you want to have to defend the product page templates for each one of them. Or if you sell bags and shoes, or if you sell totally different products and you want to have totally different product pages, this could be very valuable if you sell two different types of products or maybe more. And you'll want to have the finished product page templates that they are totally different. So you can use a metaphor to differentiate things. But if that is something like in the layout and the structure that you want, the friends, that product page templates can be perfect for you. Now going back in here, let's say you created some page template and you want to delete that because you don't want to use it anymore. You need to go in here from actions to edit code. In here, you search for your product page templates, so we called it. This is the product page. On page. What I can do is I can click in here and I can remove it from here, okay? Same for this one. I can remove it from here. So if there is a template that you want to get rid of it, we can do that, but when you, once you do it, you can come back. But once you do it, you can go back. It's deleted, it's gone forever. Okay, so this is about product page templates. You can do the same for the collection pages and for your normal pages. And we are going to see how to use these page templates, especially for the enormous pages on your site you want. And let's meet in the next lecture. 29. How To Customize Your Theme Text And Language: Hello there and welcome to this lecture and this lecture, I'm going to show you a small trick that will allow you to change text inside of your Shopify theme. So I'm going to give you an example so you can understand what I'm talking about. When you go in here to the shopping cart, for example, you have the sentence that says taxes and to being calculated at checkout. Lets say I want to modify this one and instead of this, put, for example, free shipping on orders above $100, what I can do is to go in here to actions, I go to Edit language. And from here you go two sections. You have here so many pages that you can explore. It depends on where you are going to create the change or the modification. But since this is the card, I know that this is inside of the section tab, and in here you can find that card. So what I'm searching for this sentence, I'm going to click on Control F, Control V, and this is my sentence. I can remove the sentence dotted if I wish. I'm going to remove it for you. And instead, I'm going to put free shipping on orders above $100. And I will click here on Save. Now when we refresh this page, the sentence should disappear. Okay, let me do a harsh refresh by previewing the theme for the second time going through that card. So as you can see now, I see a free shipping on orders above $100. Okay. Many other texts to find inside of your scene is in here inside of their language step. So what you need to do is to explore these tabs whenever you want to change something and you are not sure how to do it. And you can find most of probably what you are looking for Here. Okay, so that's it for this lecture. I hope that this small trick will help you to use your theme and the best way possible. Stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 30. How to Create and Manage Discount Codes: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. In this lecture we are going to talk about discount codes and how to create them. Well, I want to start by saying that discount codes can be very helpful because using them you can drive were seas and you can increase your revenue when you give people an incentive to buy from you, like when you give them 5% discount, you give them an additional reason to buy and to act and does something good. However, if you are using discount codes heavily, this might be a little bit risky because you might be training your customers to only buy from you when you are offering a discount. And this is risky because sometimes you might be offering a new collection and you want do you don't want to offer a discount on it. In addition to that, a brand that's always offering discounts doesn't look that professional. And it looks a bit like they are killing themselves to make sales. So what you should be doing by using discount codes is to be smart and use them in places where they are very essential. For example, offering a discount code for people who are, who left some products on your card might be something very smart and something much more smarter is to, for example, offer only people who are, who have, for example, more than $100 on their card that discount and keep the others without a discount code. Something very important. You don't want to play new customers to only buy from you when you are offering a discount or when your soul is unsafe. So be very smart While you are using your discount codes. And there is something also very important that I should have mentioned here that offering a discount code is not enough. You should be offering a discount code with a limited time, okay? Because when you give your customers three days to act or seven days to act to push them into acting fast. However, if you don't precisely the time, they will be forgetting about your discount code and they will not be using it. So always, whenever you want to offer a discount code, always offered it with a limited time, maybe three days, maybe seven days. It depends on your business, but always limit the time of the use of the coupon code. Okay, So inside of your Shopify dashboard, you go in here to discount. And in here you click on Create discount word. And here you can create your God, let me, for example, coil it. Welcome 10. And let's say this is the discount code I'm going to offer to anyone who subscribes to my newsletter. Okay. So what satellite of this discount code, if it's set percentage, which means I'm offering 10 percent discount or maybe it's a fixed amount, which means I'm offering the 15 Euros, for example, or 15 dollar discount. What EPA is free shipping. Some stores, for example, offer free shipping from time to time or maybe buy something, gets something. And this is also a very nice offered by the way. So for example, in my case in here, I am creating a welcome 10 discount, which means this discount will be giving to anyone who subscribe to my newsletter, whether through the pop-up there, welcome pop up all through the form. Okay. Usually you to decide if a percentage is better than a fixed amount or the reverse, you have to do split testing. Split testing means that you have to do two different offers and let a software run their difference, which means, let's say for example. You are worried or you are not sure whether you should be giving 10% or €10 or $10, you would run a split test. One pop-up will have $10.1. Pop-up would have the 10 percent discount offer. And people Landon people will be seeing seeing these offers like 50 percent by 50 percent. And after you finish the test, you will see how many people converted with the 10 percent offer and how many people converted with the €10 offers. And you see which one is performing better? In my opinion, it depends on each number, but when it comes to 10%, €10, I guess 10 percent would be working better. So, But you have always to split test and try different things Because split testing is very essential for your business and for you to growth. So you have decided percentage, and here I'm going to pick 10 percent and I'm going to apply it on all products. But let's say for example, I want to apply it on a certain collection. I can specify that. And if I want to apply it on a certain product, I can also do that. Then in here I have two precise the minimum requirements. So this is very important. Let's say for example, I sell products that they are used with the above $100, but I have some accessories that I like for $15 or maybe $20. And I don't want this discount code to be used in this case when someone is buying an accessory. So what I am, I will be doing is to limit the minimum requirements, which means that the minimum purchase amount to be, for example, $100. Which means if someone has less than $100 and the cart, they can they can be applying the discount code at the checkout phase and they can't be taking a discount. So this is very important. Here. I can give it to specific group of customers, specific customers or to everyone. I'm going to keep it everyone because it is a welcome discount. And here I can limit to one USD per customer. Okay. And it is used only one time. Okay. And, um, he, um, precising the time, so it will be working today and it will end it will start at this time and it will and heat I set an end date. Well, I have to say something. This code in here is fixed, which means it's not dynamic. The difference between a dynamic code and that code That's not dynamic, is that an HIE, for example, I'm precising the start date and the end date. However, for a welcome popup, I don't want to decide the start date because I don't know when people will be signing up to my newsletter. What I want is I caught that will be created when someone signs up and this code will will end after three days after someone signs up. So let's say I signed up to my pop up, I should be receiving echoed that starts today and ends in three days. So this is what we call dynamic discount codes. Means they are discounts codes that are created for each person. And they are, they are not static. They change depending on when when I started the action, for example, and I have subscribe to my newsletter, and when I end, when the offer ends, to create this kind of coupon codes, you need to use something else, not Shopify. And in this course I'm going to give you a small introduction about the software I use to create the main marketing and so on. And I'm going to show you how we can create this kind of discount codes, the one that they are not static. However, if you don't want to make things complicated and if you are just running like sales for a few days and it's available for anyone. This can be very good for, for example, when I have a Valentine, Valentine discount, I create a static code and I run it from, for example, the 10th of February until 20 of everybody. And this is it. So I know because I know the start date and the end date, I don't have a problem. I can create my discount code here on Shopify directly. And after you finish that, you click on Save discount code. And this is at now your discount code is alive and I can share it okay with other people. So this is it for this lecture. I hope you enjoyed the stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 31. How to Manage Your Inventories!: So we have learned how toe create collections, have to create how to add products and how to assign products toe collections. And we have learned how the ad variance to products in this video I'm going to show you how to manage your inventory. If you are selling physical products, this mean that you need to know had to keep track off your numbers. You need to know how many products you still have in your stock. How many one you can still sell, so you have to manage it invented. So let's take the first, uh, product. For example. There is no invented for this product yet, So I'm going to click on it in here, going to scroll down. And in here I'm going to choose Teoh, make Shopify tracks this product invented and I'm going to put a quantity that say I have put 15. So in this way, when someone purchased this item, Shopify will make this number unless minus one by default without you intervening. So it's really automatically updated. And this is very important because in this way you will know when you are out of stock. If you are. If you're shipping doesn't need too much time if you can. A purchase new item for two days. For example. You can allow your customers to purchase products when they are out off stock. Otherwise, keep it. Keep this one unchecked. Okay, so in here you click on save. And when we go back to our products, we can see that we have now the number off products in stock. Now let's go. And the change the invented, the off this item this item have three different variance. The variance we have created together and we are going to change the invented, the off each variant. Okay, so in here we click on edit and in here you click on Shopify Tracks product inventively. Let's say we have 12. For example. I'm going to click on Save. I'm going to change the other variance. Let's say we have Ah, then off these Now let's go to the blue one on. Let's also do the same thing and it's have eight, for example, and I'm going to click on safe now. When we go back toe, our products will be able to see, and here you can see the number off items that are left in your stock, and this is very important because in this way, shape if I would be able to track down your numbers, and you can make sure that you are not selling a product that's out off stock. 32. How to Create Blogs on Your Store and Why: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture I'm going to show you how to create blog posts for your story. However, before starting to show you the technical part, I want to talk about the importance of including a block section inside of your store. I know that you might be overwhelmed with all the tasks you have as a store owner and adding to that, writing blog posts and uploading them and everything else might be, it might seem a little bit overwhelming, but it's very important to know that a blog posts are very essential for the brand's success. And let me tell you why. I always focus and I always recommend including a block section inside of your story. Well, because if you are truly looking to create a brand that can live for years, you have to always focus on the kind of relationship you have with your customers. And in order to create a strong relation with your customers, you should have multiple touch points with them. And not all of these touch points should be selling touch points, which means that your customers, for example, out on Instagram, they are seeing your posts. They are on your store, they are seeing your product. They are on Facebook, they are seeing your posts or your ads. They are on Pinterest and so on. So there are multiple touch points, right? But if an all of these touch points, you are only trying to sell them. Your relationship with your customers will only be elevation of a seller with a customer. However, when you start writing blog posts and when you create a block section on your story, you added creating a new touch points with your customers. And these touch points are not touch points where you are trying to sell them. They are touch points where you are trying to help them. So when you have a block and this block, you will main purpose is to help your customers by providing value, by replying to communist questions, by giving advices, your customers will see a new kind of service that you are offering. And the service is you are offering for free. And this will make their relation with your way stronger. You have to know that 70 percent of people prefer to know about the brand through an information article than through a selling article. So people prefer to know about you why you are trying to help them. Let's say, for example, let's say for example, you have a store that sells sleeping products, okay? And the only kind of marketing we do is to sell out your products and to talk about your products. So the only type of relation you would have with your customers is this relation, buyer, seller. However, when you have a block section on new store and when you have blogs where you show people how to sleep well, what to eat before sleeping. What is the best position for sleeping? You will be creating a new relationship with your customers where you are providing value and you are trying to help them, and you are trained trying to improve their lives without necessarily trying to sell them. So remember, 70% of people prefer to know about the brand through and information and article. Then through a selling article, people will love to feel that you are not that commercial. They will love to feel that you are trying to help them by providing value. That's why it's very essential to create blog posts, in my opinion. And addition to that, if you are looking to the future to be sending emails to your customers and so on. You would need content, you would need data, you would need things to send them. And the blog post is exactly what you would be selling them and not understand me wrong, even if you are providing value, you will be still making sales because let's say for example, you have the stepping stones, okay? And you send an article about top five tips to sleep at night. Fifth tip, for example, could be to use a special kind of caution, and it happens to be one of your questions, one of the cautions you are selling on your store. So in this kind of article, you are first helping your customers. Second, advertising in directly to one of your products. So you block voice are very essential. And in my opinion, any brand that's looking to succeed in the future should be focusing on that because content marketing and creating content can make your relationship with your customers way better and way stronger. So this is what I wanted to say about, about the blog posts and some niches and some niches creating blogposts way easier than other niches. Some niches struggled to find the topics and I know it might seem a little bit difficult. And some nations and other niches. However, if you want to explore ideas and you're nice to know what kinds of blog posts you are going to to create. You can go always to ask the public.com. It's a website that shows you for each niche what kind of questions people are asking. Or you can go to Google Keyword Planner and see what are people, what people are asking about, or you can go, go to Google Trends or so on, defining good audience and understanding your audience and knowing what your audience is asking about and in which areas will audience needs help is essential for your success. So whether you are writing blog posts or whether you are providing new products on your store, it's very essential to need to know your audience well and to know what kind of questions and what kinds of objections you will clients have so you can help them out and you can make their lives way is yet and way better. So now going back to Shopify and let me show you how we can create the block was. So you go in here to blog posts, you click on create a blog post. And you simply add, you simply create two blog posts. And here you put your title and in here you put your information, and in here you make it visible or you can make it hidden and you click on Save. For sure I recommend you to make your blog posts that invaluable to include information that you have well-researched. So don't include wrong information. For food include images, include bullet points, make that text very clear, and so on. Well, the block editor section on Shopify is LT bit limited and not that complicated. However, if you want to create much more complicated blog posts, you can always check the Shopify App Store for apps that's dedicated to make your blog post look way better. However, I don't think that this is necessity. The most important thing is to provide value and to help out your customers. Also, if you are providing a blog post, I highly recommend you to link to your blog section inside of your Header Menu and to link to your block force inside of your homepage. So this set for this lecture, I hope is convinced you to start creating blog posts for your story. Stay tuned and let's meet in the next lecture. 33. Must Have Pages on Your Store: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to see full pages You must have on your e-commerce store. While having these pages will make your store look way professional. And also these pages are very, very important and very, very essential for your customers experience on your story. Because people usually look at these pages and they search for them and they need them in order to make the decision whether to buy from you or not. So including these pages is very, very essential. So let's start with the first state, which is the About Us page. While having an About Us page is something that you can't skip. People need to know that they are dealing with other people they need and want to meet you. That's why this page is really is one of the most visited pages on your restored. And then this page, you should tell the world what makes your brand different and why, what makes it stand out. So let's say, for example, you are a small business family and you create handmade close, okay, this is your strongest points. This is your selling point that you are a small business family may be a family, maybe a husband and wife may be that our kids and you sell handmade close. So this is what people want to know about you and the About Us page. They need to meet you. They need to meet the person behind the brand. They need to hear the story of the brand. And this is something very important. That's why in your about us page, you should make people see the person behind you in brand. And you should point out what makes your brand different. I know not anyone. Everyone likes to show their faces on the Internet. That's why if you don't want to link your, your personality directly to a brand, you can, at least on the About Us page tells a story about your brand, maybe from a third perspective or something like that. But you need to tell you the brand story. You need to tell the world what makes this brand different than other brands? Maybe you prepare begin candles, maybe you prepare organic candles, maybe you prepare had made shoes. You need to tell the world about bad and you need to tell the story behind why this brand exists and why they should be buying from you, not from another brand on the internet. And you should show your customers and other side of your business and your brand. Let them meet you and know why and how you created this business. So I want you to homepage. I'm seeing oilfield products. I clicked on the about us page. I don't want to see more products. I want to see the story behind these products. I want to see why you have created this brand. What's the mission behind this brand? What's the purpose behind this brand set of only including sentences like we are here to provide you with bla, bla, bla bla. I prefer to make it much more personal. And as I have been saying through the beginning of this lecture, I prefer to tell a story because brands with the stories can be, can link quicker to people than brands without stories. So if you have a story behind your brand, this is the place where you should be telling the world, your story. Now moving to the US shipping page. This page is extremely important, especially for people who are about to make the decision whether to buy from you or not. And then this page, you should include everything your customers must add, need to know about your shipping. So in this page includes your shipping conditions. You're shipping fees that time needed to process and ship the items, the estimated delivery time, the contact information, and the tracking information. When you make your shipping page and you're shipping conditions very clear. You will make it easier for yourself because less people will be getting directly to you to ask your questions. And because in this way you will not be very down with customer service is asking you and nagging and all of this stuff. So keep this page very organized. Include bullet points, include Frequently Asked Questions section if you wish to make it as clear as possible and include all the information inside of it, but also include them in a way that's very clear and very easy to be red and very easy to be understood. Now moving to our third paid, which is exchanges and the font page. And here I have to say something. Offering the option to refund and exchange your products is very good to increase your conversion rate. Because why people, when people that are buying online, they are usually afraid that the product will not be as good as they are expecting, or maybe that the size will not be exact and so on. So when you give them the opportunity to exchange at pretty fun, you make it way easier for them to make the decision to buy, because in case things didn't go well, they can always refund and exchange. However, if you don't clarify well, your exchange and refund conditions, you might risk getting a lot of annoyed customers and you end up burning down and customer services work. Why? If you want to include exchanges and refund and offered this, which is something I recommend, you have to add a page that states clearly all the conditions of the refund and exchange. Maybe you want the package to be untouched. Maybe you want the show's not to be used and so on. So you have to make all the conditions very clear. So the first thing you should do, as I told you before, is to make conditions very clear. And the second thing you should do is to explain to your customers what steps should they follow to refund or return your items? You have to explain that process clearly. Like give a step-by-step guide, like walk them through the whole procedure. Because if you do that on your exchange and refund page, everything will be very clear and your customers will not need to get back to you to ask two questions. So you will have less customer services work and less hustling. Let's why I recommend you to take the time to organize this page and the shipping page to make sure that you are explaining everything as clear as possible and in details to your customers. Now moving to our fourth page, which is the contact us page. Well, this page is very important because it gives you a customer's their means to reach out to you if they wish. And it links back, and that should be linking back to all of your social media profiles. So in case they don't want to contact you directly on in a, they always have the social media profiles to reach out to you. And this is very powerful when you have a small business and you are still the person who are replying to Instagram and so on. Third thing and that is done. Most important thing is to show you the customers that you are willing and ready to help them. As I told you before and as I say all the time, you're in business is not about your, your business is about your clients. So your main purpose, your first and most important purpose, is to keep your customers satisfied. And two, to make them feel welcome, to make them feel related to your brand. So often in Contact Us page and actually offering help, full information and helpful customer services is very essential and very important for your brand's success. So now let's move to Shopify and let me show you how you can create these pages on your store. So here I am inside of my Shopify account. I go in here to our limestone and I go to pages, and here I create my pages. Okay, So the first thing you have to do is to click on Add Page. At now in year, you should be adding good page. Let's say for example, I'm adding the About Us page. Okay, you just right in here about us. And in the new UI to the About Us page, About Us text. And don't forget to make it cleared at images to add bullet points and so on. And after you've finished that, say I wrote blablabla, anything in here? Okay, In here, you click on Save and you make it visible. Then you go back to your navigation menus and here. And here. And let's say you want to put it under header the About Us. You go to homepage menu and you add a page which is the About Us in here. And you add a page and you check. I'm not sure why it's not in here. Let me go back to my pages here. And you click on it. And you click on save menu, okay, for the other pages like shipping and refunds and all of these stages, you can link back to them inside of your foot it if you wish. And you can link back to them inside of your product pages, inside your tabs, or inside of your description and so on. So this is how you create pages and this is how you link to your pages inside of your navigation menus. Don't forget to always make your pages very organized to include images, to include, put it points, to include spaces between paragraphs to make your texts always left, left aligned when you have big paragraphs. And to make your article, any article you write on your stored, is it to be read, easy to scan, and so on. So the set for this lecture, I hope it will help you to create awesome pages for your stored say tool with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 34. How to Read and Analyze Your Shopify Analytics: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture I'm going to show you how you can read the numbers on your Shopify analytics. So you can analyze these numbers and use them to improve your business and to improve your soil performance. So inside of your Shopify dashboard, I need you to go in here to analytics. And in here you will have everything like all the data Shopify gives you. Okay. It's just a trial stores, so I don't have any data in here, but I'm going to show you anyway how you can explore these data. Starting from here, you precise the duration or the period you are checking the data. So for example, I'm checking the data for today, I can inhere, choose this to last seven days or 30 days and so on. Okay, let's say for example, I'm choosing left seven days. And this is that you pick in here last seven days and apply. Okay? The first graph is showing me my total sales. It's lately it's total says nothing hidden in here. And it shows me the sales each day since I'm seeing my last seven days. Okay, you can click in here to see a report. And here you have the online store sessions, which means the visitors on your stored is I can see, for example, how many sessions you are having a, you can see the improvement of your online sessions. And here you can see how much, how many return, returning customers you have while having returning customers. It's very important because it shows that people attach your customers, love you, stored, and that they are loyal to your brand. You have a high number, a high percentage of returning customers. This is, this could be a very good indication because it shows that you have a brand with a lot, with loyal customers, with people who love this blend and love their products and keep coming back to the store. So the more this number is high, the battle it shows that people are loyal to. And in here you can see when you have data, you will see a graph showing your first time visitors and you're returning customers, okay, So you'll be able to not stats. Let's see, for example, you are noticing that you're returning customer rate is very low or that it's becoming lower, it's decreasing this near that people are not satisfied with your services or with your products. And you need to start thing, modifying things and improving things. Okay, If you move in here, you will have your online store conversion rate. I covert rate is the percentage of people who actually convert after visiting, visiting your store, which means if you receive 100 visits per day, you are making one state. It means that your conversion rate is 1%. If you are receiving 100 visitors per day and we are making 10, says it means your conversion rate is 10 percent. Well, this is a question many people ask me, which, what is a good conversion rate? Well, we can say there is a good conversion rate and a bad conversion rate, but we aim to get the highest conversion rate possible. Because depends on each business somebody says I sell very high ticket items, so the conversion rate might be lower than others, so we can't just easily, but the most important thing is to keep this number growing and to keep, and to keep improving it. Okay, in here you can see in addition to the online store conversion rate, you can see the at the number of add to cart, the number of people who reached checkout, and the number of session converted, which means that people who actually bought from you. So in here, these numbers are very important because it shows how many, how many people added to cart and how many people converted. And any e-commerce store loses people in the stage show. Some people go to the product page at the products that got copied everything. And once they reached a point when they should be buying the atom, they bounce out. Okay, this step between Add to Cart to purchase is a very important step because people who added a product to a cart, people who are very interested about your products, which means it's easier to convert them that they showed interest, they clicked on buttons, they behaved like people who are willing to borrow. So that's why it's very important to be able to reach out to those people and to convert them and reach out to them. Either you have to use Facebook pixel with Facebook retargeting campaigns, or you can use email marketing with email flows, which are both will bring you Ella would be a lot of states, but I have to say something that if you follow up through emails with costs will be very low and you will get a higher return on investment compared to ads, okay? Because with ads you will be paying more. This is something that you have to keep in mind. In addition to that, now with iOS 14 update, the retargeting campaigns on Facebook are not as effective as before. So it's better to do both if possible, e-mail marketing and Facebook ads. And if you are still just starting out and you aren't our budget, I highly recommend you at least to create your Add to Cart flows, which means to follow up via email with your people, with people who left items on the cart or initiate checkout and then purchase. The more that difference between the add to cart and the convergent session is. As less data because it shows that most people are actually binding. So if you are improving things on your shipping conditions, for example, or on your crisis, and you start noticing that this difference between the African and the session converted is becoming smaller and smaller. This would mean that you are doing good. You are actually improving your numbers and you are performing that. Okay, after this section, which is in my opinion a very important section, you'll go in here to the average order value. And this is a number that's very, very, very important. And average order value is how much a customer, one customer is buying from you. The higher this number is, the better, because you have to know something convincing a customer to buy from you and the first time is the hardest thing you can ever do, okay? So gaining a customer something difficult, okay, so when you gain this customer and you make this customer buy more from you like to increase the average order value. This means that you will be increasing your sales. So let's say for example, you are running ads and you are paying $10 to acquire one client, okay, So the cost per client is $1, is 10 dollars, okay? If this client is buying only a candle with $10 profit, this means that you are not making any profit. However, if the customer, instead of only by buying the Kandel, he ends up being the candle. The second candle may be some soap. So you increase the average order value of the same client so you are making more money. So you'd purpose should be to increase this value and to increase this value. There are many things that you can do. One of them is to use up-sell and cross-sell. And one of them would be to create items that can go into cross-sell. So if you are selling items that are, they are somehow expensive. Let's say you are saying products that are $100 or maybe $50 or something like that, it would be very smart to create small accessories that can be both with their main product. In this way, you'd customers will be increasing that average Court or the value and they will be buying from you. Remember always if a customer is buying from you something, you can't convince them to buy something much more expensive. So if I am buying from you, establish a, a bottle, a water bottle for $10, you can't convince me to buy another one for $20, you have to cross-sell with an item with a lower price because in this way, it's easier to convince me as a buyer by the second item. So the average or the value is something very important that you should keep in mind. In here you have you taught you total orders, which means the number of orders they are receiving. End here you have the top products, so which means you have your bestsellers. In here. You have your online store session by traffic source. So if you're running ads, if you are doing email marketing, if you are doing Google advocacy, and here you are number so you can know from where you are getting the traffic. Okay, after that, you have saved by social source. So if you have, for example, Instagram channels, something like that, you will be seeing that in here. In here you will be seeing dedication, which means online store sessions by location, how from where people are checking you out. And in here you can see that device, whether it's desktop or mobile. And in here you can see that sees attributed to marketing. Okay? This is something if you are doing marketing inside of Shopify, which means if you are using the abundant cart flow of Shopify, shopify, you will be seeing that in here, but you are not going to do that. And here you can see that top landing pages by sessions, which means that most visited pages and so on. So these are the Shopify analytics and it's very, very important to keep track, track on them. Because when you see these numbers, you can improve your source. So you can see, for example, that when you change the shipping conditions, the conversion rate is becoming better or maybe worse. So you have to you can know and guess what was the problem to fix it on Monday, what was that a good thing you did so you can read the word and the future. Now below dashboards you have the reports, okay? This report are very good because they can give you detailed information about your analytics. So first year you have the essays and inside of the sales, as you can see, you can see sales over time says byproduct, says buy discounted by traffic, reference and sales by channel and so on. In here you can see the sessions. And here you can see that profit. In here you can see also the total sales. And here you can see that behavior. For example, you see the online store conversion over time and so on. And you can access each one of these and get more detailed information in here. Also, you have the marketing. Let me say for example, I want to check out my online store conversion over time. I go in here, I can see in here in details my numbers and I can see in here also in details my numbers. Okay, so keeping track of these analytics, It's very important because they can give you a lot of information about how to improve your store and how to make it perform way and wave at it. But if I want to name two numbers that are the most important to you, it would be you toss it says actually three numbers. You're taught essays, your average order value, and you're returning customer late. Okay. I, I, I want to emphasize on that because I know that many people forget to analyze their data and analyzing that data is the only thing that will make you improve your stored. Okay, So now you are bending it, but at some point you want to improve it and turn the order to improve it. You should be able to read your data and the best way possible. So this is it for this lecture. I hope this lecture will help you to analyze your numbers and to approve your store according to these numbers. Stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 35. How to Increase Your Average Order Value: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to talk about how to increase your average order value. This lecture is extremely important, especially if you are aiming to succeed. So make sure that you watch this lecture very carefully and that you watch the following lectures on So because they are related to this one. So in this lecture, I'm going to explain to you why it is important to increase the average order value. What is the average order value and how we can increase it. So let's start first by doing this small exercise. Understand more what I'm talking about. So let's say for example, we are on this case, we have a customer on our stored he both this shoes, this is good. This is that purchase. The ascending price of this shoes is $30. Okay? And in order to acquire this client, in order to win this client, we have paid $10, maybe on paid ad, maybe on collaborations. I'm not sure what, but our cost is $10 per purchase. So it's $10 is a cost. $30 is the price of the shoes and the production cost is $10. Okay, so in order to, to produce this shows I'm paying $10. I'm selling this source for $30, and I'm paying $10 in order to gain that customer. So my profit would be the selling price minus the cost of acquisition minus the production cost. Because the cost of acquisition and the production costs are costs I'm paying, okay? And this is the amount of money I am getting. So the customer is paying me $30 and IM Pei paying $20 as cost. So my profit is $10. Okay, so I'm going to repeat, a customer visits my store by the shoes, the cost of acquisition is $10, the card value is $30, that production cost is $10. So my profit is $10 by selling price minus cost. Simple as that. Now let's see the second example. Now, the same customer, instead of buying the shoes, he is also buying the socks. Okay? So my cost of acquisition is also $10, might get value now is $40 because the socks is for $10, so it's now $400. And my production costs for the shoes and the socks is $15. So now I'm paying as costs 10.15 and I am getting as a price, $40 sign getting paid $40, and I am paying twenty-five dollars as cost. So now my profit is $15. Okay? So these are two different scenarios. In the first scenario, the customer only, both at the shoes and the second scenario, the customer bought the shoes and socks. Okay? So why I am more profitable in this case? Because simply put between these two different cases that he may the acquisition costs remained fixed and the bot in both cases, I'm still paying the same amount of money to acquire the client. I'm still paying $10, whether to add or collaborations or to influentials. So I'm paying $10 in order to win their customer. And when I was able to convince the same customer to make more sales, my profit. Increase. So this is why it is very important to increase your average order value because your costs with the acquisition costs will remain fixed when the profit will not remain fixed because I'm convincing the same person to buy multiple products. So we are making more money while paying the same cost, okay? So the cost of acquisition remain the same. My production costs for sure went higher because now I'm selling two items, but my profit is higher because I was able to convince the same client to buy multiple items from me. That's why increasing your average cart value is very important. So now let's move to the true definition of average order value. The average order value is the number, is the amount of sales you are making divided by the number of orders. So, let's say for example, you are making $10 thousand in sales and you have 100. This means that your average order value is 10 thousand divided by 100 is $100, which means that on average, a customer on your stored, we'll be spending $100 per the purchase. So now our aim is to increase this average order value to increase our profit. So how do we increase this average order value? Wealth increases average or the value, we use two very powerful marketing strategies. The first one is called upsell and the second one is called crust. Then I'm going to explain the difference between up-sell and cross-sell in order for you to understand more what I'm talking about. What I'm saying is when a store suggest that you buy an upgraded version of the same products you are buying. So let's say for example, you went to a store that sells coffee machines and you were about to buy the version 2 of the coffee machine. And suddenly before proceeding to the checkout, you have received a pop up asking you if you want to upgrade to the Virgin three of the coffee machine. But this time you would be paying maybe extra $20 or something like that. And you know, you have to know something. Customers, people in general prefer to buy the upgraded version, that better version of everything because they want to be better. When you ask them whether they want to buy the better version, mostly probably they will go with a better version. There is a, an example I have read once and a book. People like to have always the battle of everything better, Virgin, the most advanced cell Fonda, most advanced desktop and so on. That's why when you often then this choice between a virgin and the better virgin, most probably they will go with a better version, especially is that if the difference in price is not too big, if you add upselling with a huge number, yes, many people might not be accepting or up-sell, but if you add upsetting with maybe 30 percent of the original price or 20 percent, many people will be going with the upgraded version because as I said before, people prefer to get the better version of everything. That's why upsell is a very, very powerful marketing technique. And you have to keep in mind that you can't up-sell with big numbers. You have to keep your up-selling percentages acceptable and realistic. And the best way to decide how much you should be up-selling good process is by testing and by seeing how your audience interact with your offers. Now, this is for the upsell and a very small and very common example about upsell is when you go to a McDonald's or a Burger and they asked me if they want their large meal and most probably you would go with a large mean. Now going to cross del, cross L is different than upsell. It's when Eastern asks you if you want to add an item related to item. So for example, you are buying shoes. Thus to add asks you if you want to buy the cirques that go with the shoes, you are buying a laptop. And the story asks you if you want to buy the mouse and the mouse fat. So as you can see Cross then is when you convince the customer TBI related items where upsell is when you convince the customer to buy an upgraded version of the product, he was originally a buy-in. So there are different, but they are both very, very powerful and it's very recommended to use both on your store. And I'm going to show you several apps that allow you to create, up-sell and cross-sell on your story and a very professional way. And remember, we want to make more sales, but we don't want to push our customers away from us. So we won't be very cautious while providing this kind of offers. And you want to keep in mind that you should be offering things that will help your customers. Your customer should be, you should feel grateful that you are offering them these ideas because they would, they would feel like, Oh yes, this product is very good with mine. I would be taking it because it will make my life better. So recommend things that makes sense, the command, things that we provide value to your customers. So this is it for this lecture and the next lecture I'm going to show you the apps that will allow you to create, up-sell and cross-sell. And I'm going to show you several types of upsells and cross cells. So stay tuned me and let's meet in the next lecture. 36. Best Free Shopify Apps for Social Proof: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture I'm going to show you my top three Shopify apps. And I know that this topic might be very fun to many of you because I know that when I first started with working with Shopify, I was a love with the Shopify App Store. So in this video, I'm going to show you my top VFS and later on I'm going to show you my top paid apps. However, you have to keep in mind that these apps worked for me. So for your business, for your case, you have to see if these apps works for you or for you. And if you need additional apps, you have to go to the Shopify App Store and you have to explore what apps are available there. However, you have to keep in mind that using too many apps can slow down your website. When you have a slow website, this means that your customers will start to bounce out of your stored and you will be losing customers. And six, so be cautious while using the apps. Don't download. Thousands of apps, use only the asset. They are very essential for your stored and keep them as short. And this way you will make sure that the apps are not slowing down your stock. Let me start with the first app I want to talk about and that this product reviews app, as I have said before many times in this course, having productive use on your stored is essential for your success and for increasing you would store conversion rate. Because when people are buying online, they have several objections. They are scared of multiple things. And one of them is to buy a product that's not good. So reviewers can kill this objection because when people read what other people are saying about your product, when they see that other people are satisfied with the product, they feel more confident when they are making the decision to buy from you. So it's very essential to include the views and to give your customers the ability to review your product. So the first step I'm going to show you it's called product reviews by Shopify. I'm going in here to shop for apps. And I'm going to show you this app. It's 100% fee for your life, for you to store a lifetime. It's a very simple app to use. I'm going in here. It's called the product reviews. And it is powered by Shopify. This is the one. And this is what I'm going to add this app to my store. I'm going to click on add up. And in here I'm going to click on install app. Okay, The first thing I need you to do is to go to settings, to install instructions. And you have to copy this snippet from here. And to paste it inside of your product dash template liquid under this section. So I'm going back in here. I'm going to my online store. I'm going to actions, I'm going to edit code. And in here I'm going to actually open its product desktop played dot liquid in order to find it, you click in here on product dash template and you will see it, okay? And you click on it and a dopants inside of this code. And here you have to search for product description. I'm going to search for that. I'm going to click Control F. So this is the section below the section I'm going to add a product reviews. Snippet and this is this not that I have already edited before. That's why it's in that. But let's say I want to add that now I'm going to copy this code from here. And I simply go in here and I paste that code like that, and I save this file. Now let me go back to my online store and let me show you how this looks like. I'm going to adhere to click on View store. And I'm going to click in on a certain product page. And as you can see now I have a customer review section. You can see the location of this section depending on where you have pasted this code. Okay? But keeping, but putting it here, usually it's very safe under the description. Okay. Now there's something very important that you have to see before that I'm going to apps and I'm going to my productive use. And in here you can manage those settings. Let's say for example, in here you can enable or disable the autopublish. In here. In here you can tell Shopify to send you a message whenever a new review is submitted. And here you can change the star I can color in here. You can change some things related to the layout and how it looks like. In here you can change the text related to the Review tab. And in here also you can change that X. Okay, So you can go all over of these. So I can go all over these and change things as per your brand, all depending on what you like to see on your store. And this is, this is how you start collecting reviews and showing them on your story. And also when you add reviews here in the homepage that reviews will be showing under the product. So if this product, for example, has three sides, you will be seeing that if you inhibit under dot-product. So this is it for the first app which is productive use app. You have to know that with this app, the F01, you can't allow your customers to add images, okay? If you want your customers to be able to add images to you today or reviews, you need to go with a different app, a more professional app, which is the one I'm going to show you later on this course. Okay, So this is for the first app. Now let me save this, this. Let me go back to our second app, which is Section feeds. This app which is Section feed, I'm going to show it to you. Let me go back in here to the Shopify App Store. So the section field is a Shopify have that allows you to add an Instagram section feed inside of your homepage, which is something very important for social proof. And it is important to drive your customers from your store to social media profiles and so on. And it's a showcase for your products. So you're going to get to Section fields. You click in here on this one. This is the section field. I'm going to click on it and you add this after store. It's also very simple to be used and it degrades with almost all that is. I'm going to in here to my Shopify now, I'm going to click on install app. So now I have to link my Instagram account with this app. I'm going to click on Connect and I'm going to link my own Instagram profile with it. My personal one because it's the one that's used on the SPC. I'm going to click on Allow. So now I have count as linked in here for, in your case, you should be linking your business storage account. And here you have to configure that theme. So you go in here and you click on your theme. This is the one I'm using. And finally, you click on Add aphids. So now I have been moved to my theme editor. And if I go in here and I click on Add section, now I can add an Instagram feed section. Let me scroll down. And this is the section I'm going to add this section. So as you can see, it's showing my Instagram posts. I'm going in here. I can change the heading, for example, I can put follow us. Below it. I can wrote either my hashtag or the hashtag of your brand or they would brand slogan. I prefer to add your Instagram, your band hashtag. In here. You can change, it can add a button with a link or you can change the appearance of the posts that say, for example, I want this impedance, or maybe this one. And I can change the image size. I can even show it full width or not. And I can add spacing between images or not. And I can't change the, let's say I'm in here. I can't change the number of the rows. I have to be in a grid layout. So now I have a different appearance, but this is too much, so I'm going to keep it to two. Here. I can add overlay. For example, I can choose to open Instagram when someone clicks or do nothing. I can show the author the captions for the date and so on. I usually prefer not to show the caption needed the day. And also the author. I only like to open on Instagram when someone clicks. And here you can change the colors and you can change the overlay or best. Yeah. Okay. So if you want to have an overlay opacity, you can change it from here. So this is, it looks very good, I like is ready to use this layout. I think it looks the best. And this is a, so as you can see with this applicant, simply add a, an Instagram feed to your stored. It looks very professional, it looks very nice and you can add this feed only on the homepage. So in this lecture we have seen the first two free apps I recommend and the next lecture we are going to see that third free Shopify App I also recommend, so stated with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 37. Best Free App for Post Purchase Upselling and Cross Selling: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are still working on the free Shopify apps that you should be using. And in this lecture we are going to talk about the reconvert app, which is an app that allows you to do post-purchase upsells and cross cells. So let's start. Well, this app is a little bit more complicated and it's much more important for your story. It's an app that allows you to create, up-sell and cross-sell. And the thank you page, which means that allows you to create post-purchase upsets and across cells. And why this is important is because when people are ready customers, which means when someone already trusted you and decided to buy the product at one to the checkout page and proceeded with the, with the order. This means that there's already a customer. This is a customer that you have one convincing a customer to buy something new from your convincing and under customer to buy something from you is way easier than convincing of all converting a totally new person to buy from you. When you offer a discount, when you offer upsell and cross-sell at the thank you page, you are offering something for someone who already trusted you and who already bought from you. That's why this is very powerful because when you hit done with an offer at the thank you page, they have the option to directly add the new item to their previous order or maybe to buy new things and so on. So let me go now to show you this app and to show you what does this app do? Exactly. So going back to the Shopify App Store, I'm going to convert. You have to know that this app is a free for a store that receive less than 50 orders per month. Okay, So I'm going in here and I'm going to add up to my store. The customer service of this app is incredible, literally incredible. They always reply, they always help out, they make things very easy. So using this app we are going to create thank you pages different thank you pages. And then this thank you pages we are creating. We are going to create some kind of offers, okay, and I'm going to show you how to do that now. So here we click on, Let's go and you are going to start using that. So now I have the app installed on my story. I'm going to click here on Approve subscription. And now the app will be alive and I will be able to start working with it during this course, I'm going to show you another app that allows you to do post-purchase, up-sell and cross-sell, and at some more professional lab than this one. And it's also an app that I highly recommend, but it's maybe more expensive than this one. Let me now go to create a new template. When I'm creating a new template, it means I'm creating a new Thank You page. Okay. This is that conversion monster template. This is the one given by them, given by very convert apps. I'm going to click on it. And here I'm going to click on add. And I'm going to show you that different offers they are including this thank you page. So now the template was loaded. I'm going to give it a name. So let me call it for example. Thank You page. Often one, since we might be offering different things, okay, I'm going to click on Save. So this is the first template we are creating. If you think that this template is too much, not worry, we are going to remove many of these things. But this is the template that was provided by default, by the convert. And I guess they have included everything to make it clear to you what are the different options you have? However, if you are creating a thank you page for your story, I recommend you to only include one author to make it simple for you to, simpler for your customers to take the offer. Don't confuse them with many options like in this thank-you page in here, keep it simple, keep it straight and keep it easy for customers to take the offer. So and here we have the header, the left area and the right area, okay? If you want to modify the left area here we have the product recommendations, which is this part and it does an example of crust then. So if you are setting laughter, for example, here we can be seeing mouse master, keyword and so on. After that, we have this section and that is the one provided by Shopify and we can't remove it. And after that, we have the social sharing part. And this is the part on the left section. You can add a section if you wish, from here. Now going to the right section area, and here you have the birthday collector and that product, upsell and he. Okay. So in here, wherever you are, you can offer a discount for the second product. They are buying, different product they are buying and you can give it a, a limited time, give the offer limited time. Okay. If you go back to this area in here, for example, let's say I want to modify this part. I go in here and then here I can find anything. I want to modify it, okay, so I can change the text, I can change the colors. I can change everything. Okay. I can't change the discount I'm offering. If I'm offering a discount and I can change the colors, the tags, everything, okay? Now moving to this section, let's say for example, I want to add something, so I'm going to click on Add section. And in here I can find all the sections that this app allows me to add inside or the thank you page. Okay, so I can add product recommendations, call to action, free text image with text and so on. Many, many options. As further reconverted, they say that offered that makes most of their sales or which is, which converts the best, is a pop up that offer a discount. So this is something they usually recommend you to do. So you might be concentrating that are usually preferred to try first with product recommendations because I think it would be easier to convince someone to buy a smaller item with the item they were buying. But also you can offer a discount once on law and once on a store I was I was working on we have offered a pop-up with 20 percent discount on the next order, which means if you have a boss from us, let's say today and you went to the Thank You page. You will get a 20 percent discount on your next order. Well, it was a little bit confusing because some people went back to the store, they cancel the first order and then they order that said they reorder it with a 20 percent scope. So it was a little bit bad because we had to deal with a lot of customers service. That's why I recommend you to test your own offers. See what kind of things do you want to offer your customers and what kind of offers will bring you most of the results while being very clear and to your customers and way easier for you when it comes to customer service. So as I told you before, in our case, when we offered a pop-up post-event percent, many people were going back to the store and canceling that first-order, which is what? Which was very bad for us because we offer 20 percent on the next order, not on this one. So you have to test. That's why you have to test and to decide which works best depending on your audience. Okay, Concerning the birthday collector, I recommend you to have this one. I guess it's very nice for sure I recommend you to make everything very in line with your brand. So we define this section to make it, to make it in line with your brand and collected customer's e-mails and then link them to your email marketing system so you can contact your customers when they have a birthday, when they have their birthdays, send them gifts and them incentives to buy from you and so on. This kind of offers, when you add offering something very personal like birthday gifts or something like that, it improves your relationship with your customers and it improves the way your customers, your brand. And usually it has very, very high converting the conversion rate because it is very personal. So I'm going to remove this one from here, for example. I'm going to keep the product recommendation. I'm going to modify some things in hidden in here. Here you can choose how this recommendation will be, will be done. It's a Shopify recommendations or any of these options or you want to specify a specific collection. If you want to exactly ClustalW with items that makes sense, I recommend you to create a specific collection and to link to the specific collection in here. Let's say for example, I mean, I'm linking to my organic yarn collection. So now the item that we'll be solving here will be my organic yard collection. Okay, in here I can exclude some tags. So let's say for example, inside of this collection, I don't want to include the needles. I can take all the needles with the attack needles and I can exclude the tag from here. Okay. I can hear high the products that are in the original order, I highly recommend you to do that. And then here I can't change that x. Let me hear you decide how many products you want to see. I guess three is very reasonable. You can show the number of products because you are showing, showing arrows. And let people slide and see the different products. Here you can set up review integration if you wish. So you will see also that induce in here. Here you can offer you precise what kind of offer you are giving your customers. Are you offering a discount on the cross-sell or are just offering across that? Okay. Maybe you are telling them add this product to your purchase and I'm going to give you a, for example, 10 percent discount. Okay? So now I'm offering them this with a 10 percent discount. I'm not sure why it's not showing, but it should be showing. Okay, What else? Addition to the discount, you can also apply free shipping. So let's say you want to apply discount and you want to apply free shipping. You can also do that. And in here you can display the price, how you are seeing the prices. Now you should be seeing the process. This is the price before, say this is the prices, I guess after sale. And now we are seeing the price before and the price after. Okay? And you can change the colors. Ok, in here you can show the quantities if you wish. You can change the button text from by now for example, to add this item, you can keep it by now. We can remove this button out or keep it. I prefer to remove it. You can add time and if you wish or don't edit that depends on you. Okay. So this is how you modify this thank-you page. When you finish, you go in here and you click on Save and active. You have to know that they often a lot of tutorials. So if you go in here and you click in here, you can see a video to help you set up the stack of page. In here you can see the mobile view. Okay, and in here you can click and save. Now I'm going back to my app dashboard. Okay, So here I have my first Thank You page, okay, and I need to eat. I can't see my analytics, for example, how much stays I have been doing out of this AB and so on. And in here I can start to create my first triggers. Okay, so I'm going in here to triggers. And I'm going to click on create, your first triggered. Okay, So the template I'm going to show is this one. And that would be when someone, for example, purchase from my story. So I go in here and I click on Add triggered. And in here I choose that river name. Let's say that your name is someone bought, purchase. So in here for example, that trigger will be purchased at, say I'm talking about purchasing any item of my stored. The template would be this template I'm showing this template and here I should be adding the condition. So people who are meeting this condition, who meets this condition will be the ones to see this thank-you page. For example, in here I can be other details. For example, it can be other options study. It can be using user oppression for this order is one, which means that people will be able to see this offer, this thank you page one time after the accident. Thank You page. So whenever they buy from us, they go to the Thank You page. The first time they go to the Thank You page, they see the author. Why I'm setting this up this way because I often ClustalW inside of this thank-you page, I often them to add an item to the original item. And this way I will be lowering my shipping fees and I will be making more sales out of the same client, which means I will be increasing my average cart value. Okay? That's why it's very essential to me that the customer makes the decision to buy through this cross sell directly after he makes the first-order. So I can add the new order to the previous order. I can combine the two orders. So let's say I'm selling sneakers and I'm offering socks at the thank you page. I want to be able to combine the others and send one item to my client, the sneakers under socks at the same time. So it's very important to me that the customer makes the decision directly when they when he or she adds to the thank you page for the first time. That's why I make this specific rule that the impression should be one, okay? And I click on Save. So now I have created my first trigger. Let me show you how to create your second triggered. You're going to add triggered. And let's say this time I want that all people who have both yarns to see different Thank You page I go in here and rename that triggered and they changed the template. Let's say I have created a different template for this exact triggered. I threw that template from here. Here I choose, for example, product purchase data. I can, for example, choose between these options, product tags, product price, product title, and so on. Let's say for example, I am picking title for example, okay? So at least 11 product should be, for example, yarn. It doesn't work that well. Let me try for example, product, the type and let me type in here yarn. An order for this to work. I should have associated types to my products. As you can recall, the product page, you can give tags and you can give types to product. Let me show you. Hi, I'm I'm a product page. This is a product. I can't choose tags and types. So in here you can give product type and you can add tags. Let's go back to the apps, to the reconvert app. So inside of that trigger, you can make that trigger words depending on the type and that the act is this Jewish, this is one of the easiest way, the ways that you can do. Okay, let's see Now, let's see now in addition to that, I want also this triggered to this to be seen only one time by the same customer. So I'm going to click on Add. And I'm going to add the same condition in here are the options. Use an impression for this order is one. To be honest to figure it out. These conditions I have to contact the support of the convert. So if you want to create some triggers that they are a little bit complicated, you can always contact the Support and they will be more than helpful for you. Okay? After that, when you finish up creating your triggers, you can go in here to dashboard and you can check out how this app is working. So this is it for the reconvert app. I hope that this lecture will help you to use this app easily and quickly, state on with me. And let's meet in the next lecture where I'm going to show you the remaining two free apps that I recommend you to use. 38. Additional Free Apps to Level up Your Store Performance: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are still working on the fish Shopify apps that you should be using to your story. And in this lecture we are going to see the last two free apps I recommend. So let's start. Well, Shopify email is an app that allows you to send campaigns to your customers. It allows you to send more than it allows you to send 2500 emails for free each month. Okay, so let me show you the app. It's very simple. I'm going to click on add up at. I'm going to show you how it works. Well, if you don't know, what is the main marketing, we are going to talk about email marketing later and discourse. But email marketing is when you contact to reach out to your clients using that image, which means you send them newsletter and you sell them, selling our tokens and so on. Well, this app allows you to send 2500 and images for free each month. So if you have a smaller list and the are just starting out and you are, you want to send images for your customers. This app can be very helpful. However, if you want my opinion and if you want to take to make your brand actually professional, you should not be limiting yourself at creating campaigns. You should be going with a full email marketing system. And don't worry, we are going to discuss this later through this course. But however, if you are just starting out and you want to keep things simple, this app can be very helpful. So you can, for example, sand discount emails. You can send the blog posts, vacation in males and so on. Let me go in here and click on create an MA. In here you can pick between the standard templates. So for example, as you can see, this is end of sale. Let's say you are running three days stayed because it's Valentine's Day. You can send the first image on Monday telling them about the same. Then the third e-mail after today's telling them that it's the end of the day. This is what we call campaigns. They are e-mails that you send and precise moments depending on, for example, sales on your stores and maybe new blog post or maybe you are launching a new product and this kind of things. So let's say for example, I'm going to topic, for example, a, a Christmas he made. Let me go to, for example, do this one. So as you can see here, we have the we have to precise to whom we are going to send our email here. You can choose your cut your lists or you can go to customers stage and create lists. Here you can resize the subject line that preview texts and from the, from email. Okay? Now if you want to go to the budget and here you can also change everything. Here you have the logo, you can make it bigger, for example, like that. Here, this section, for example, let's say I want to change the background color to make it go with my band. He, for example, also, you can change the font and you can change the text color and the background. And if you want to change the text, you need to click in here and change it, okay? If you want to delete a section, you click in here on the section, you click on Delete. If you want to move a section up or down, you drag it like that. If you want to duplicate a section, you click in here, and so on. Okay, So after you finish all of this, you click on sand test and then you send it. As well as I told you before, if you are just starting out with your stored and you don't want to create a full email marketing system because this can be adequate bit overwhelming when you are starting out if you don't have guidance and if you don't know much about the main marketing, this app can be very helpful for you to start out bleaching actual clients via image. However, at some point when you want to actually move it business to annex level, you should be moving to a more professional software. And I'm going to show you one in this course. So the app I'm going to talk about now it's called tabs by station. And that allows you to add tabs to your product page. Here, Let's check this app and see how it works. I'm going in here two tabs by tab by station. This lecture, this app allows you to add tags inside of your product page. If you are using a theme that supports tabs on your product page, you don't need to use this app. However, if you are using a theme that doesn't support, support tabs on your product page, I recommend you to consider this app. So this is the app in here. I'm going to add the app. I have to be honest, I don't usually use this app because I always use themes that provide tabs by default, okay? But in case you are using a free theme that doesn't support tabs, I recommend you to go with this app. It's very good. I have tried it on several trial account and that works very good. So, and here you can click on Enable calves and current theme. In here you can choose between adding tabs to a single product or to adapt to a group of product. Okay. This is what we call shared tabs and disrupt recoil managed specific tab. Let me show you first some tabs so you can understand well what I'm going to talk about. So this is the app I'm going to show you a preview. So okay, so as you can see, this, these are tabs, okay, So inside of your product page, instead of having all the text and one big tax format, you will have the text divided into tabs. So you will have a tab for reviews at that point. Materials, taps for shipping, taps for sizing chart. If you have some kind of products that need maintenance, you can have a maintenance tab and so on. That will make the product page look way better because instead of putting all the information inside of a big test text, you will be dividing the information and two tabs, which will make your product page look much more professional, okay, sometimes might be common between different product pages. So for example, shipping, tab, refund, maybe maintenance that might be common between the finished products. However, some other tabs might not be common between different products, such as, for example, their product description, maybe the sizing chart and so on. So we have two types of data, tab that they are dedicated for, specific product and tabs that they are common between different products. Okay, and this app allows, allows you to do both to create a tab that's common between different products. And this app allows you to do both. It allows you to create tabs that there are specific to a single product. And that allows you to create tabs that they are different, that are common between different products. So in here you can create specific tabs, and in here you can create shared tabs. And in here you can change the settings. I'm not going to show you in detail how this works because they have tutorials for everything. So you just need to watch a tutorial that will walk you through the procedure. Okay? So as I told you before, including tabs can be very helpful to make your product page look much more professional and much more better. So this is it for this lecture and sit for the topic of the Shopify apps, stay tuned and me and let's meet in the next lecture where we are going to start discussing a new topic. See you then. 39. Practical Examples of Cross Selling and Upselling: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture I'm going to show you how you can apply up-selling and cross-selling pure store in order to increase your average order value. I'm going to show you some examples. Then in the next lecture, I'm going to show you how to apply them on your store. So I'm inside of this team is called prestige and I have talked about this scene before on this course. If you scroll down in here inside of the product page, you can notice that below this section, I can find in this section, buy it with. So I'm here checking this bag and they are suggesting and other back, this is some kind of cross-selling. There are convincing me to buy another product while I'm buying the first one. Now if you scroll down a little bit further, you have also, you may also like. So this is also another cross-selling feature because now if I'm buying, for example, this bag, I might go in here and check other things that might be very interesting to me. So this is also another example about presetting. Now moving down also you have the recently viewed and this is also cross-selling and these are all called product recommendations, and they are meant to increase the average order value of your customers. Now moving to another type of up-selling and cross-selling. And it is when you offer free shipping on orders over a certain amount of money. So for example, this stored is offering free shipping on orders over 70, $70. So let's say for example, I'm shopping on the store and I'm buying an item with $50, I would be intrigued to add another item to my cart to reach this threshold and to get the free shipping. So in this way they have increased my average order value and they have increased the average or the value of their customers. As I told you in the previous lecture, it's not enough to include up-selling and cross-selling on your a store. You should be including it in a very smooth way and in a very professional way. And order not to push your customers away from you. And you don't want to look very commercial, so you need to look like you are trying to help your customers and you are trying to provide the best value ever for them. Okay, So this is another type of crust of cross-selling and up-selling. Now I'm going to show you a third type, which is a little bit more pushy, but still it's very powerful and many, many, many people use it. So let's move to the third type. So the third type of up-selling and cross-selling you can use in addition to having the free shipping board and the related items is to create popups. Okay, so here I am inside of this product page for example, and this is a coffee machine. Okay, when I click here on Add to cart, now they are telling me that this, this, this item goes very well with the other items. So why I don't added to the cart. Okay. So they are suggesting a new item while I'm buying the first item. Now, let's try something different. So now there are suggesting something at a lower price. As you can see, it's a funnel. I closed the first pop up. Now I'm seeing the second pop up with an item that is lower in price because maybe the first item they suggested was very expensive to me. They are now suggesting a less expensive item which is for $26 and something I might take. Now let me close it again, and I didn't take the offer. Now let's go back, for example to this page here and let's see an example of upsell. I'm buying this coffee machine, it's for $200. So now when I click on Add to cart, they are suggesting me to buy. It's a premium version and to pay only $50 and addition, or to pay the super-duper Graded virgin and to pay $600 more. Okay, so here many people will be taking this upsell since it's very close to what they were almost paying, that there is a great probability that someone would be abrogating to this. This is a very expensive, so they might not be going with this. And also here I want to mention something. Many people, the entire marketing plan tried to offer three different offers, like offer a over b and offer sea. And they offer a very sheep offered first and they offer a medal prize than they offer a very high price. Because people will not be going to the high price, they will be going to the medium one and they will be picking this one. And I guess, and this up-sell, They are trying to do that. They are offering something very expensive. So very few people will actually be paying $800 instead of paying $200. But many people would be, would be increased. What? But many people would be intrigued to pay $250 instead of $200 in order to get a better version of the same product. So these are examples of things you can create on your store. So as you have seen, there are three things you can do. You can add related products as products, you can add shipping bars with thresholds. For shipping bars with thresholds and you can add pop-ups. Well, in order to do all of these unit, to either have them already included inside of your theme. All you need to use apps concerning the related products and there isn't it, you'd usually those come with the theme, so you don't need to worry about them. But concerning the fishing rod and the pop-ups, these are things that require additional apps. And then the next lecture I'm going to show you these apps. So this is it for this lecture. Stay tuned and let's meet in the next one. 40. Pre-Purchase Upselling and Cross Selling Shopify Apps: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. As I promised you in this lecture, I'm going to show you the apps that will help you to create, up-sell and cross-sell on your story. The first app I'm going to show you, it's called the free shipping, but, and it has actually a free plan that you can use. But if you want to take things to a totally new level, I recommended to go with the second plan, which is the paid one. Here you can see the plans. You have free one and you have one with $10 per month, okay? It's not expensive and it's very, very recommended. And I'm going to show you why this app does not only offered a free shipping bar. Let me see the example store. It also counts how much people need until they reached their feet. Check out threshold, which means, let's say for example, you are offering free shipping for all orders above $100. When I go in here and I add this item to the cart, this year will be changing and they are telling me that I only need $80 to get the free shipping going back and I'm going also to buy another item, let's say this one. And now they are telling me that I'm only $10 away from fishing. This is actually very effective because in this way your customers will be able to keep track and they know which items they should be adding to the cart and art in order to reach the free shipping threshold. And not only that, this app allows you to create different fishing birds depending on your customers locations. So let's say for example, you offer different shipping, free shipping conditions Up then in USA or in Australia. So you can, and the inside of the app customize this. So you show different shipping bars depending on their location. Let me add this app toy store and let me show you how it works. So I'm going in here to add this bar. And don't worry about the weird design in here, you can customize it to look very, very professional. So I'm going to add this in here. So I'm here inside of the app and I'm going to click on Create a new bar. I can choose between all of these designs. I will go with the most normal one that say this one, the black widow with the yellow. And then here I can't change the text for example, in here, this is the name of the free shipping by, let's say for example, I want to have this Shipping Board and France, France tripping work. Well, let's see, in UK to keep it in English. So in UK, UK shipping, why? Free shipping goal is $100, for example, free shipping per orders over, you can change the message and he'd progress message only away from shipping. I can, for example, say, how much remaining until shipping. In here you have, Congratulations, you've got free shipping. And here you can add a link to the wall if you wish. And you can include Close button. I recommend you to not include a close button because it appears at the top of your screen, so it's not annoying and no one needs to remove it. And here you can show where to display a. Do you want to display it at the top bar? And you wanted to push the remaining of the page and so on. And here you precise or currency. And in here you can change the slide styling. And as you can see when I'm upgrades, you have access to more styles if you wish. You can even add your own image, but I guess the black and the yellow or the black with any of your other color blend colors will be more than enough. And in here, for example, you can change the font if you wish. You can change the sizing of the letters, everything. And you can choose if you want to make it disappear, I won't do that. I will keep it all the time and you can decide where to show it. For example, do you want to show it? Doesn't show it on all pages. Do you want to exclude, exclude some pages. You want to target some kind of devices. Maybe you want only to show it on desktop or on rabbis. In here you can do a customer targeting with XMI, which means that you can target by this section is for the upgraded version. So if you have different fish shipping conditions depending on the locations of your customers, you need to upgrade to a more to the paid version in order to make your customers see their fee shipping VD depending on their locations. And this is also here include that include additional customer in code. But this is not something that you would need actually. So this is it for this app, as you can see, it's very simple and very powerful and it can highly increase your average order value. Now moving to the second app, which is doubled upsell app. And this app does not have a free virgin. And actually to be honest, very few, I don't think there is an upsell app actually that's full fleet because usually all the up-sell and cross-sell apps, apps that being a lot of sales. And they are used by professional websites. That's why they are usually paid. And this app actually is the best app on the Shopify App Store in my opinion, and doesn't look at all spamming. It looks very professional and you can create funnels, which means, which means, for example, you can show that first book up to your customers. Let's say you are recommending first mouse. Once someone close the pop-up, you can command and other item and so on. This is what you call it fun and like multiple offers, I usually prefer to offer only one thing in order not to push my clients away because I work with professional brands that care too much about keeping their customers satisfied. So I think in this way, this way is the best to keep customers satisfied and not annoyed. So keep it simple. Try one offered and make the offer valuable and make it relevant and your customers will go with it, make sure mixture of that, believe me. So in order to add this up, and we actually see in the demonstration of this app and the previous lecture. Let me take you back a little bit there. Maybe you want to explore this further as we have seen before in here, when you click to add this one day suggests another item. And when you go, for example, this second item they are suggesting and so on. If you go in here, the same as well. If I'm adding this one, they are suggesting the pi by two pounds instead of buying the one-pound and I'm only paying a dollar. So this is what I'm talking about. Let me go back now and here, and let me try to add this app to my store. I'm not sure it's going to work because my stories at trial one, but let's start, Let's try it. So let me click on install app. So I went, they will give me 14 days trial. I'm going to click on start the trial. Let me accept and continue. And in here they are taking me inside of this app if I want some head. So skip for now. So let's create our first offer and I'm going to put my offer name, let's say it yarn crustal. Let me say let me precise that triggered. You can choose between Add to Cart and before checkout. I prefer to make the pop-up show when someone Add to Cart a product. But as I have been saying throughout, all the scores, always recommended to AB testing. So try different things like dry the Add to Cart, try that before check out and see what works best for you. And I'm going to choose cross-sell am going to trigger this uptight on a certain product. So you can either choose to show this upsell for all of your products whenever anyone click on Add to cart on any of your products, or they can choose to make it live for a certain product. Which is something I'm going to do. I'm going to specify one product. Let's say this one. Then I'm going to offer my upsell. Often. You have here you should be writing descriptions and so on. I'm going to offer this one. And I'm scrolling down and I'm going to save offered here. You can add some. Let me do it, right? Anything hidden should be if you want to add some conditions to the, to the upsell, you can do it in here. Like for example, if you want to, like for example, if you want to add some conditions related to the value of the card and so on. So for example, you can only show you'd offer if the customers cart value is within the range you specify with the settings. So if you want to on your Often this upsell for people who are buying, for example, an item between 20.100. You can do it in here, and so on in here you can offer you. Here you can manage additional options. Like to make that product image or a product names linked to the product page or to hide products that are out of stock. And I'm going to click on Save offer. So here I am inside of the product where I have created the upsell. Now when I click on Add to Cart, I should be seeing that pop-up and this is the up above. This is where my title is showing. This is where my description a sewing and this is what I am offering. So these are the two apps I recommend you to use in order to create cross-sell and up-sell on your store. And this is it for this lecture and the next lecture I'm going to show you how you can retain your customers. And it is a very, very important topic for anyone who is looking to succeed in e-commerce. So stay tuned. Admit me there. 41. Introduction to Tidio for Shopify: Enhancing Your E-commerce Experience: Hi there and welcome to our special series where we are going to talk about Do. Tdeo is a very powerful tool designed to improve your Shopify store. In the coming three lectures, I will guide you through the incredible features of Tdeo and how they can elevate your e commerce business. In this series, we'll explore three key functionalities of Todo. First, we are going to see how to use the AI customer support with Liro. We are going to discover how do's advanced AI chat bot Liiro can provide round clock support with no human intervention, increasing customer satisfaction and efficiency in handing queries. Second, we are going to see how to use Do Shopify store automations. We are going to learn how do's dedicated chat bots for Shopify automate important store functionties. And not only that, they are meant to help you increase your sales, generate more leads, and solve your customers problem. Third, we are going to talk about Em marketing and we are going to see how do can help you not only to capture your customers leads, but also to keep the connection or keep the conversation happening with them through campaigns. And not only that, also you can set up automated flows using do we are talking about a welcome flow and an abundant card flow. These flows are very important to stay in touch with your customers and to enhance your sales. By the end of this series, you will have a comprehensive understanding of how Todo integrates with chopifi to improve customer engagement, automate key processes, and drive more sales. 42. Tidio: Setting up AI Customer Support: Hi there and welcome to the first lecture where we are going to talk about do and how to set up your AI customer support. Well, today's we are focusing on Liiro Do's advanced AI Chatbot. Liro isn't just another chatbot, it's a dynamic AI assistant designed to improve your customer support. We are going to list some of the key benefits of using Iro. First, with Liiro, you can offer 24/7 customer support. Liro offers round the clock support without a human interaction or intervention, ensuring your customers always have help when they need it. Also with Liro, the interactions could be very human. Like with the advanced AI, Liro analyses and responds to customer queries in a way that feels so natural as if it's a real human talking to them. With Liro, you can significantly decrease the human interaction because Liro replies to around 70% of the questions. Then we have the multilingual capabilities of Liro. Liro can communicate in multiple languages, making it perfect for a global customer base. And this is very important if you sell in different markets to different people. Also with Laro, you can set customizable responses. You can tailor Laro to match your brand, voice and style. And in this way you improve the experience next. Because of all of these things, Liro help you to make your support team much more efficient because it can handle routine questions and freeze up your team time. And not only that, it can also lower your cost because now you need less people in your support team. Not only that, Liro helps you to gather valuable customer insights based on interactions. So all of these features make Claro a very important asset for your customer support. Enhancing satisfaction while improving efficiency. In this lecture, we are going to discuss how to implement and optimize Liro for your needs. Let's move to my screen and let's start seeing how to set up Tidao, then Ro. So here I am inside of Tdao. From here, I want you to start by clicking on Get Started for Free. This is how we are going to sign up to Tdeo. You start by entering your email address, then you create your password, then you enter your website URL. I'm going to use this URL. As for a trial store, I'm going to put the URL in here. I will click on I Agree and click on Get Started for Free. Here, I need to start by answering to these questions from today. First, I need to enter my name. After filling my name, I need to fill out my job roles. I'm going with founder. Then I need to fill out how I want to interact with customers via what do I want to interact them with? Via e mail, Instagram, live chat, or what I'm going with email and website live chat and we'll click on next. Then I need to fill my company industry. Since we are on a Shopify course, most probably this will go with online store. Then I need to fill out my company size. I will go with only me. Then I will need to fill my company Number of inquiries. If you don't have any idea you can go with I don't know yet, then you need to choose in here, the platform where your website was built. So you go with Shopify and you click on Next. Then we need to fill out more information. I want to have Todo up and running now within one month. Or what I will go with as soon as possible. I'm currently, I'm just getting started, so I will go with this one. Where did you learn about do we can choose in here to fill out Someone told me about it or maybe I've heard about it in the course of rehab. I click on Rehab Course on Skillshare, and I click on Start Here. You can tell today where you want to start. So do you want to start by building chatbots or configuring help desk? Or by setting up e mail marketing or enabling Liro. Or you can decide to go with everything. I will go with enabling Liro, since this is the topic of this lecture. And I will click on Let's go. This is the Dao dashboard. And here you can change what you are doing, whether you want to install Iro or chat boards, or maybe work on your e mails or check out the customers or the analytics. Or you can go below in here to settings and update your Dao settings. You can go in here to integration to make sure that your website is integrated with Shopify. You go in here and you click on Install Integration. You put your Sofi URL in here. You don't need to put this part, by the way, and you click on Connect to Shop Fi. They will take us to Shopify to install the app. The integration will be set up like within seconds. Now it's integrated. What you need to do is to go to Shopify Theme Editor to enable integration. From there you go, in here you go, in here you click Enable and you click on Safe. Now I have the app enabled on my store, and I can see it from here. Okay, let's go back in here to the Liro section. As you can see in here, they are giving us instructions about what to do in order to make the job even easier. You click on Activate Ro. You need to click on Accept. You need to give Liro some information about your website. In order for Liro to start creating like a list of questions and answers, you can give them your website URL or you can generate Q And based on your preferences, if you click on website URL, what you need to do is to put your web URL in here. As simple as that, you can give them your frequently asked questions section page. You can give them some RL, In your opinion, that makes sense. Like terms and conditions and so on. I'm going to put my personal e mail as an example, just like to show you how this works. And you click on Upload. Liro will be now, Liro will use the URLs that I have provided to know more about my website to be able to generate better answers, to chat better with customers and so on. It's very important to give Rod URLs, like frequently asked questions like terms and conditions like maybe your shipping conditions and so on. So if we go now in here we have one page but we didn't have any questions and answers. If you click here on Manage, you can see that you can generate them by yourself or Add manually. I will click on Generate. I will put my website R L and the click on Generate. Now Liro will be generating questions and answers based on my website, based on the data they have read from my website. This is actually very helpful, especially if you have an FAQ page on your store. In this case, you will make the work much, much easier for Liro. As you can see, Liro has generated 25 questions Based on my website content. I can click on Ad Selected or I can choose to remove some. I'm going to add everything after adding them. I can actually go to these questions and modify them. I can even add my own questions. Okay. You can also help Liromre by adding more knowledge, like adding more website URL, add manual questions, and so on. Once you're done, you can click on Activate Liriro. It starts working on your store. Now Liro is activated on my store. I can go in here to the playground to test out Liro. I ask Liro questions, I see the answers, and so on. So for example, let's say I want to ask it about shipping time. Liro would be providing the answers for me, okay? You can reset even the test from here and you can show more from here. If you want to see like more questions After the playground, you have the tasks in here. You can automate some of Liro's tasks. You can start by creating, let's say, a task from scratch, or you can make it easy for yourself and click on Explore Plates. And you can see like, for example here, some templates. So product availability, return policy, offer discount code, check order status, exchange policies, and so on. Let's go with this one. Check order status. No, check a customer's order status when visitors request it. Only available for Shopify store. I will click on New template. So this is the template I'm going to click on. Test it Out. Okay, here we go. Let's start checking the status of your order. Do you have an e mail or order ID I can use for that? Yes. I will click, for example, use my e mail address, Judge. So Liro is going to ask me, all right, what's your e mail address? I provide my e mail address and Liro will be giving back the status of my order. If you want it to be activated, you need to click here on activate. You can, as I said before, like use the template from Liro or you can create your own like template from scratch after tasks you have configured. And here you define the settings of Liro. You choose what Liro will do when it can't answer a certain question. In here for example, you decide if you want to use, if you want to allow ro to use imoges here, if you want to be multilingual. So you go with this one. After that you have the analytics in here. In here you can track everything happening with Liro in terms of interaction, answers, the number of questions, and so on. So as you can see, using Liroper simple you just need to follow do steps and follow their templates. If you don't know from where to start with time, you will be able to minimize a lot of work and make your customer support much more efficient. Thank you for watching this lecture and see you in the next one. Bye bye. 43. Tidio: Setting up AI Customer Support: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. In this lecture, we are going to talk about do sales chat bots. These are your digital sales force. These chat bots are more than just automated tools. They are designed to boost online sales and customer engagement in a very effective way. Okay, with these chat bots, you can increase your sales, you can generate more leads, and you can solve your customers problems. And not only that, Ideo offers a lot of templates of already made chat bots that you can directly use within clicks. Now let's move to my screen and let me show you how to use actually these chat bots and how to install them on your store. Now we are going to see how to use DO says chat bots and how to install them on your Shopify store. From your Do dashboard, you go to this section in here which is chat bots. And as you can see, you have three different options. You have strategies, you have templates, and you have my chat bots or the active ones. Okay, when you click on strategies, you will notice that Do is dividing these strategies into two sections. First you have increased sales. Then you have solve problems for online stores. These are meant to increase engagement, increase conversion gain card abundant like retrieve them. And these are more tailored word engaging, better with your customers. Making sure that they are satisfied, making sure that we are replying to their questions and so on. If you go in here two templates, you will notice that they have divided their templates between increased sales, generate leads, and solve problems. This is actually where you should be spending your time, because using these three sections, you will find the templates that you are looking for. Do provides a wide range of templates that you can use. I'm going to start with increased sales and when I do that, you will notice that there are like in here, so many templates to pick from. You have card abundant. You have proactive welcome message, product recommendation card booster, and so on. What you need to do is actually to choose the template. Let's say I'm going to go with a card Abundant. I will click on us Template. In here they are telling me the category, they are allowing me to test it out if I wish. They are telling me the key feature of this template. I'm going to click on used template. As you can see, they are allowing me to customize the messages. The first message is order is almost complete. Can you tell us why you abandon the card, please? We are talking with people who put items on the card but they didn't convert and we are trying to convert them. This is the first message, let's say I'm going to keep it as it is. This is the second message. This is where I'm giving them an incentive in order to push them to buy. They didn't buy, They left products on the card G there. This is 15% code in order for you to purchase. In here you add a code, you name it, you decide on the percentage, and you click Safe. You can keep this as it is and not even touch it and just get it up and running as it is. If you want to do some more advanced editing, you click on advanced editing. In here you can see like the algorithm of this. Okay? If you don't want to go that deep, it's fine, you just don't touch it. But if you want to play around a little bit with it, you can see, for example, the different steps that triggers everything else. Okay. If I move up, I will see that this is the event, someone abandoned a card. So this is the event when this flow is triggered or when this chatbot is triggered, we have a certain delay, like 5 seconds. Then in here we are asking them like why didn't you buy this or that, and so on. You can add steps, you can modify steps and so on. If you don't want to get things complicated, just forget about that. Click on activate, click on close, Go back in here. Use template and simply use the template as it is. It's already amazing. You don't need to change anything about it. You can change the coupon code if you wish, if it doesn't work for your business, and click on Activate. Now I have this abundant card. I have it up and running now when someone leaves products on the card, like they will be triggered to complete the purchase using the discount code. Okay. You can test it out like this order is almost complete. Can you tell us why you abandoned the card? I will click. I haven't finished yet. No worries. If you need anything, let us know. If you go back in here a little bit and you go click on Edit, you will see that these three options that we had, like I haven't finished, I have finished all three options they are in here. Actually, let me make it a little bit bigger. The first question, they have three options I haven't finished yet. I haven't decided yet. I found a better deal and each option takes us to a different road. So if you are a little bit familiar with algorithm, you can algorithms or like this, you can work around modify it. But as I said before, you can keep it as it is without touching it. It's fine as it is. Okay? This is the abundant card flow. If I go back to my templates in here, let's see what other things I might want to have. I will go back to increase sales. I will go, let's say, discount for new visitors. Again, we have the template, you can test it out. I'm going to test it out this time for you to see it. Hi there, nice to see you. We have 10% promo code for new customers. Would you like to get one now? I would say yes. Sure, cool. What's your e mail address then? So this is actually where to is capturing my visitors leads to is capturing their e mails in order to keep them on their database. And in this way, when we start doing campaigns and tture three, you will be using these leads in order to send e mails. Okay, So this is actually where T is playing the role of a lead capture because in order to give them the coupon code, they need to give you the e mail. And this is actually a very smart thing to do. Remember, it's always very important to capture your customer's leads. Because through e mails you can reach out to them, You can contact them, you can stay in touch with them. And in the lecture three, I'm going to show you how to use do actually to stay in touch with your leads. So I'm going to type my e mail. Do should be giving me back the coupon code. I'm not sure why it's not doing this, but it should be okay. Let's now go back in here and click on new stamp plates. As again, we can modify everything about it. I'm not going to touch it. Maybe I want to make this ten, for example. Let's make it 20. But I need to go back to the first message and tell them that I'm offering them a 20% off save Activate. It's very important to note that whatever you want to offer a discount, you need to make sure that it works for your business. It makes sense for your business because each business is different and the margins are different. So based on your business and the discount that you can afford. If we go back in here to templates, you can find a lot of chat bots that you can activate. We have increased sales, we have seen some of them. If you go to generate leads, you can see in here that you have a lead magnet subscribe form. You have news and updates. Reactivate, welcome message, lead generation, pot order a phone call. A lot of things that you can choose from, many of them are actually new, so you can test them out. Let's say we want to do this one, order a phone call, you click on a template. Let's use a template. Would you like us to call you? You click on Save Activate. If they said yes, you start collecting. If we test it out, you start collecting your customers. Also phone numbers, which is also a smart strategy. Let's say yes, please. Sure thing. What's your phone number now? I'm giving them my phone number. Okay. If we go back in here one more time to templates, we have the solve problems and these are more towards like customer engagement. You have frequently asked questions, I res, bundle, so on and so on. You can choose and pick any of the templates that work for you and for your business and activate them on your store. When you finish from here and you go to my chat bots, you will see your active chat bots in here. You can filter by the type or see all of them. And you can also check out if you want to filter. You can see the number of coupon used and so on. That's it to how to use the chat bots from Tideo. As you can see, you have a lot of chat bots and a lot of templates to choose from. Make sure that you are choosing the ones that make sense for your business and that will help you increase your sales and improve your business. 44. Tidio: Collecting Leads and Sending Email Campaigns: And welcome to this lecture. In this lecture, we are going to talk about Do's e mail marketing tools. Tideo makes it easy for you to craft and send personalized email campaigns. These are fantastic tools to stay in touch with your leads, to announce your latest products and services, or to keep your audience engaged. But that's not all. With Tdeo, you can also set up some basic email marketing automations, such as a welcome flow, an abundant card flow. These flows are very important for boosting sales and retaining customers. They work in the background to keep your customers connected and encourage them to complete their purchases. In summary, do's email marketing capabilities are an essential tool for any shopify store. Helping you increase your sales and maintain strong customer relationships. Now let's move to my screen to see how to use Do's email campaigns, how to set them up, how to set up the automations, and so on. So here I am inside of T Deo again, and this time we are going to go to e mail marketing. As you can see, you have campaigns, automated flows. And you have what you have added. When you go to campaigns, you will see like different sections. So you have custom templates. If you want to start from scratch, you have like the already made templates. Those are meant to boost online sales. You have basic templates. You have discounts, holidays, newsletters, products and services. Depending on what you are going to announce in this e mail, you can use any of these templates or you can always start from scratch, Create your own template, work with it, and keep using it In the future, I'm going to actually to holidays, I will pick, for example, this template. I will click on Preview to make sure that it looks, let's say as I wanted to look, it looks nice. I'm going to click on your template Here, I should name my campaign. Let's say it's Valentines Day. The email subject should be, let's say Enjoy Your Love Day with 10% discount the audience. And here I select, I want to send it to all users, only to subscribers. I'm going to click on all users and click on Next. So here I am inside of the editor and I can start modifying my e mail. I can modify, for example, these sections When I click on each of them, I can, in here, see what I can do about it. So for example, in this case I can replace this with my logo. I can replace this with whatever I want in terms of like this is mainly the menu. So I can change it. I can modify it. I can in here, like change the items on the menu. So instead of having, I might remove this one, for example, keep only three or I might remove everything. It depends on what I'm trying to do in here. Whenever I click on an element, I can start modifying it. So I can modify the text. I can modify in here, like for example what they are saying. I can change these icons in here, I can change the text and so on. If I want to add more sections, I go in here two blocks and I just drag and drop. Okay, so it's very easy to add sections. Very easy. In here you have the appearance, so you can change the general settings of the email, like the words, the alignment, what you want to do with the margins. You can go in here, in here, and change like things related to the colors and appearance. You can play around with these settings in here to make sure that the email looks like you wanted to look. It's very easy. You will be like reviewing everything that you are modifying directly here. Once you finish setting up the email you click on next, you either schedule it or you send it right away. And that's it. Now this is how to send campaigns. Now let's talk a little bit about automations. If you go to automated flows, these are images that to send based on the customer's behavior. This is for the welcome, this is for the Abundant card. Let's try this one. For example, I will click on new template. This is the Abundant Card. This is going to be sent when someone like left items on the card. Let's say I'm going to use this subject line, okay? As you can see in here, this is the content. They are like inviting them to return to the card. In order to do the purchase, you can decide to offer a discount code. In this case, you need to like set up the discount code on Shopify and copy the name and put it in here, let's say five or something like this and embedded within your abundant card e mail. Okay, The second thing you can do is that you can go to Automated Flows and you can modify your welcome flow. You can click on your template and do the same thing, like modify the e mail and set it up. I highly recommend you to set up like automations because usually the welcome and the abundant card are the most important too in terms of sales. And they usually perform very well and they convert very well. 45. How to Retain Your Customers: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. In this lecture we are going to discuss a very, very important topic, and it is how to retain your customers if you want to succeed in e-commerce or in actually any kind of online businesses or real-life businesses, you must focus on retaining your customers and keeping them satisfied. You will customers are your most valuable assets. And I'm going to tell you why. You'd parsers are people who already trusted you. There are people who are already tried your products and services. So convincing them to come back to you and to buy from you again, is way easier than converting new customers. And it's also a way cheaper. So your customers are very valuable. And in this lecture and then all the following ones, we are going to discuss how to retain those customers and how to create loyal, long life customers out of them. Now we are going to start with the first lecture on this topic and I'm going to explain to you some facts of why retaining your customers is extremely important. So let's start. The first fact we are going to discuss in here is the following. That toughest sale to make is your first C. Once your customer commits to making their first purchase, selling them something else is much easier. Because as I told you before, those people aren't people who tried your products. They know their quality and their services you are offering. And assuming you are offering good products and goods, goods services. They are people who are happy with what they both. So convincing them to come back to you and to buy from you is way, way easier than converting a total stranger. So that's why, remember that fufu sale, the first one after that. It's way easier to convince the same client or the same customer to come back and buy from you. So now let me show you some numbers from one of the stores I am working on. As you can see in here, these are our total sales, Okay, so these are our total sales each month. And as you can see, the blue section in here is returning customers and the green section is the new customers. Starting February 2021, we started to implement the main marketing and we started to create a real email marketing system. And as you can see, the results are showing now our returning customers are making up to half of our, almost half of our total customers. So as you can see, if you have a true system in hand, a system that's able to retain your customers. You can easy, easy, improve your numbers by convincing your old customers to come back and buy from you again and again. So as you can see in January 2021, 71 orders were coming from first-time buyers and 23 where we're coming from returning buyers. However, in February 21, you can see the difference. Now we have 39 coming from returning customers and 85 coming from first-time customers. So as you can see, our number of returning customers has increased. And as you can see, if you move to March 2021, now we can see 65 orders coming from returning customers. So can you see that difference starting with 23 movie to 65? This is actually very important because it shows that when you setup a strong in main marketing system, you can easily convince people who trust you and who love you to come back to your store and to purchase more and more products from you. Now moving to the second fact, well, this fact is actually very important and this is something that you have to understand very well. You don't own Facebook or Instagram. So no matter how much your pages are big on Instagram or on Facebook, you don't own that data. They're the only data you have control on its your email list. So don't be fooled by thinking that it's enough to create a big Instagram page. Well, yeah, a big Instagram profile, something very good for your business. Creating social media profile with high engagements is very good for you, but it's not enough because you don't own the data, Instagram and Facebook on your data. If you want to create a sustainable business where you are on full control or almost on full control, you have to focus on growing your e-mail list because this is the only asset that you have and this is the only asset that you can count on 100% because you own this list. You don't own Instagram, you don't want Facebook. Maybe today there is Facebook. Maybe tomorrow we will have something else. Maybe Facebook will not be here anymore. So your business should not be relying on a third party platform. It should be relying on you. So you should be focusing on a glowing your email list. This is something you can never miss. Now moving to the fact number 3, running successful Ads campaigns is becoming more and more difficult. And this is something that you have to know, especially with the iOS 14 you update and with everything going on, with privacy and everything like that. Now, more than ever, it's hard to act to create successful Ads campaigns. I'm not saying it's impossible if you know how to run Facebook ads, you can still make sales. But now it's much more difficult, especially when it comes to retargeting. I'm not sure how much you know about the new updates of Apple, but starting this year, for example, people can opt out of tracking, which means that Facebook, Instagram, or any other, or any other advertising platforms will not be able anymore to track all our behaviors, which means they will not be as effective as before. That's why relying entirely on Facebook ads and thinking that this is your big thing to do is not entirely right. You have to diversify your traffic channels and you have to own your customers information and your visitors information by creating a strong email marketing system and by capturing your customer needs and by owning your own in main marketing system and your own e-mail list. Now moving to the fact number for being able to stay in contact with your audience without the need to invest in ads is extremely important. Well, if you have been running Facebook ads for a while or if you go do collaborations or Instagram influencers or any kind of paid ads, you know that in order to get sales, you have to pay, invest to get the sales, right? Because this is how it works. They are paid ads, but this is not relying only on this system that you have to pay to make sales is not healthy because it means that you will always be paying a lot in order to make sales. And it means that you are always counting on a third party in order to make the sales. However, when you create any main marketing system, when you set up your foundations correctly, you don't need to rely on anyone because you can create sales without using someone else you can create stays out of the people who love you, people who gave you already their email addresses, people who already trusted you, and so on. That's why you have to diversify your channels. You have to work on a growing your business in a healthy way. And to grow your business on a healthy way, you should focus on growing your e-mail list because it's your most valuable asset. So now let's discuss how you should be thinking. You should be thinking in this way if you are looking to grow your e-mail list and if you are looking to retain your customers and if you are looking to create a business where you are not entirely relying on Facebook ads or Google ads or any kind of paid ads. You have to think in this way, whenever a new visitor land on your store, your main purpose should be first to make him buy from you, which needs to make this customer converts. However, your second most important purpose should be to get the lead of this customer, which means to get the email of this customer or to get the phone number of the customer. So you may purpose estimate that, say for sure, your second most important purpose is to get, to catch them early. Because when you catch that and you can follow up with this person in the future and try to sell them something new or something else. Let's say, for example, I'm running a store where I sell book lovers accessories. And a random girl landed on my store. She liked what I'm selling. She like the stool, but she didn't want to buy anything. But instead of that, she saw that I'm offering a discount for time for first-time buyers or like for example, I publish a weekly blog posts about books and this is something she is interested about. So what she did, she gave me her email address, she gave me her leap. So what I will be doing with this girl lead, I will be taking her email and I will be sending her emails to get her to come back to my store. And I'm going to discuss this more in the next lecture. But in this way I will be gaining this girl as a long life visitor to my store and hopefully in the future as a customer. Okay. So when you have your customer leads, you can reach out to them via e-mails to connect with them, to create a strong relationship with them, and to try to sell them. And this is how you retain your customers and this is how you retain your business. Now moving to the last slide, which summarizes everything. So how to retain your customers? If you want to retain your customers, the first thing you should be focusing on is to do brand building, which means you have to focus on creating a brand, on providing good value to your customers and serving them. The second thing you should be focusing on is to create a strong in main marketing system. You have to reach out to your customers through emails. You have to offer them value and you have to enforce their connection with your brand. The third thing you should be focusing, focusing on is to create multiple touch points with your customers. So don't only rely on paid ads to bring traffic, focus on how to retain that traffic you are getting and how to make the most out of it by creating multiple touch points. Which means if you are running ads do not only rely on the ads, also think about how to capture the needs of your customers in order to reach out to them later on via e-mail or maybe via SMS and so on in order to create multiple touch points with your customers. The fourth thing you should be focusing on is to create loyal customers. Focus on serving good clients and putting them first. And always remember that your brand is not about you, it's about your customers. This is something that you have to keep in mind if you are looking to create a sustainable business, your business is not about you. It's about the people you are serving, which means you are at your business is about your customers. So this is it for this lecture and this lecture we have seen why detaining good customers is important and how you can retain your customers. And the next lecture we are going to discuss how you can collect your customers leads. So stay with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 46. How to Collect Your Customers Leads: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. In this lecture we are going to talk about how to collect your customers lives. In the previous lecture, we have talked about the importance of retaining your customers. And now you know that in order to retain your customers, you must first collect their leads, which means you have to collect their email addresses or their phone numbers. And in this lecture, I'm going to show you how to collect these leads. The first thing you have to know here is that in order to catch your customers leads, you have to give them something in return. People need a reason to trust you, and they need a reason to trust you with their personal information. That's why in order to convince your visitors to give you their e-mail addresses, you have to give them first a gift or maybe a discount code, or maybe a promise or any kind of incentives. And in this lecture I'm going to show you the different things you can do an order to catch your customers lease. So let's start. So in order to catch your customers needs, you have different ways. Either you use for apps, which means they are pop-ups that show when someone enters the store or when someone is about to leave, or you embed a form inside of your homepage or inside of your footer where you invite them to subscribe to a newsletter or something like that. These are the different kinds of things you can do to capture the leads. Let's see them in details. So let's see These types in details. The first type of lead capturing you can do is to use embedded subscription forms. You have to include this form on your homepage and again on your footer. And you have to give your visitors incentives to join your e-mail list. So for example, you can offer them 10 percent discount or you can promise them that in the future you are going to send them special offers and promotions, like in this example in here. Now moving to the second type, which is the welcome pop-up. This is a pop-up that shows when someone visit your store. So in this mock-up, you have to give you a visitor's incentives to join your e-mail list. And this pop-up will look something like that. So you tell them, for example, that they can take 10 percent off on their first order if they signed up using this spoke up, all that, they will get exclusive news and offers. So this is, this pop-up is very, very powerful because it shows when people are just on your store, you can make it appear after, for example, 60 seconds or maybe after people scroll down on your page for like 30 percent of the page or something like that. But the most important thing is to keep it in there because people like the spoke up and it has a very high conversion rate usually. Now seeing another example of this pop-up, for example, in here they are offering a welcome pop-up and they are giving $50 off if I signed up to this pop-up. Okay. Now moving to that third type, which is the exit intent pop-up. And this pop-up is very powerful. It shows when someone is about to the investor and it gives you the visitors incentives to join the list or to purchase directly. So for example, in this, in this image in here, we can see that this pop-up is asking people to take $10 offer before leaving. So as you can see, it's meant for people who are leaving. So it says Leaving so soon before you go sign up and take $10 off your first order and believe me both a welcome pop-up and the exit intent pop-up work very, very well. Okay, So these different kind of lead capturing are very important and I highly recommended tools. All of them like really use. All of them, include embedded forms. He was welcome, pop up stores, exit intent, pop-ups. You can play around three things on the blog post that they are different than things on the homepage and so on. But the most important thing is to give your customers that way away to subscribe easily to your email list. Here are some thoughts that I should be. Here are some things that in my opinion, you should be focusing on. The first one is that whenever you want to create a pop-up form. And in this course I'm going to show you how to do that. You have to create two versions. You have to focus on a, you have to create a pop-up for your desktop version, and you have to create a pop-up for your mobile version. The second is that you have to leverage A B testing. If you don't know what is AB testing it means to test the two different versions at the same time. And this is something that goes automatically. So you tell the software to, for example, tried to different types of pop-ups may be one with 10 percent discount and one with 10 dollar discount. And you see that the difference between the performance of each pop-ups and you decide which one is performing better. You can test many things. For example, you can test different colors, different offers, different images and so on, and see which ones performed the best. In this way, you will be optimizing your system. The third you have to focus on is to follow up with your customers through e-mails. And this is the topic of our next lecture. So in the next lecture we are going to see how to follow up with the image you have captured using these forums. And we are going to see how we can convert those visitors or those leads into customers. So stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture because it is extremely important. 47. How to Reach to Your Clients via Emails: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. In this lecture we are going to talk about how to reach out to your customers via e-mails. As I told you before, in order to retain your customers, you have to create multiple touch points with your customers. And it means are very, very engaging touch points and people usually open their emails and they interact with them. So let's start by defining the two different kinds of follow-up emails you can send. The first type is campaigns, and those are emails you send you an email list whenever you want. So for example, you are doing a Black Friday offer. You use campaigns to send this offer. Let's say for example, you have some kind of a special holiday, maybe it's Mother's Day. So you can send a newsletter with mothers they offer dedicated precisely to this offer. Also campaigns are good, are the ones you use for newsletters. If you have a blog section on your story, Use campaigns to tell you an email list that you have, a new blog posts on your store. So campaigns are things that you send manually and you send on precise dates. If you are running it through email marketing system, I recommend you to at least have one e-mail per week. Send your email list. You have to keep this connection with your customers. So if you skip several weeks, your customers will totally forgot, forget about you. So you have to keep a schedule and you have to prepare content, and you have to be paid emails to keep this connection between you and your customers because in this way you create loyal customers. The second type of MA's are the flows, and they are actually sequence of images triggered by certain actions. Let me give you example. Let's say a customer visits you'd stored, he initiated checkout, put his email, started to enter the information, then decided not to buy. So now I have the image of this customer because he entered the e-mail on the Shopify form. So now what I should be doing is to create a flow that's triggered when someone initiated at checkout and then y. And this flow, I follow up with this person in order to convince this person to buy from me. And this is what we call abundant cart reminders or abandoned cart flows. So this is one type of loads that you can create. You can also create welcome flow, which is the flow that's triggered when someone gives you their lead. So for example, let's say you have a pop-up, a welcome pop-up offering 10 percent discount, you should be creating a sequence of emails sent to the person who signed up to this form in order to remind him of the offer in order to keep him or her getting back to your store. And other type of e-mails of sequences you can create is post-purchase flows. And there are many, many other ideas like birthday flows when back flows, early bird flows and so on. The main marketing field is a very rich field and you can create multiple flows and you can automate all of that because flows are automated, you create them once and this is after creating them, you just need to follow up to optimize, to test new things. And this is it. And the flows in general can make up to 30 percent of your total sales coming from the main marketing. So you have to focus on the flows. You can't miss them. They are very important and they are automated, which means that they are not something that you need to worry about for a long time. So that's it for this lecture and the next lecture I'm going to show you the software I use an order to create my e-mail marketing systems. The software I use is actually a very advanced one. It is very friendly user and using it you can create many things and you can create a very complicated and a very big in main marketing system. However, you have to keep in mind that it may marketing is not the topic of this course. So what I'm going to teach you in the next lectures, our introduction to email marketing system. They are very good if you are just starting out and you want to make sure that you are creating that I foundations for your business. However, if you are looking for something much more advanced, you have to do more advanced things. So let's meet in the next lecture where I'm going to move to my PC to show you what software I use and how to use it statehood and meet me there. 48. Klaviyo: General Introduction: Hi there and welcome to this lecture and this lecture and the coming ones. I will be showing you how to use Clavier in order to create your email marketing system. Well, gave you as a software or an app that allows you to create a very complicated email marketing system. However, in this lecture and the upcoming ones, I'm going to show you the basics. So I'm not going to go deeper into everything related to email marketing because this needs a course by itself. I'm going to show you the basics and how he can start out. So if you have zero-knowledge and inbound marketing or if you are doing some things in marketing, the lectures will greatly help you to improve your system. They will not be enough to take you into the most advanced level, okay, this is something I need to tell you. So these lectures are meant for beginners, for people who have no idea about how to setup that inbound marketing systems. And I'm going to try to cover all the basics. However it may, marketing is a topic, a very large topic, and if I want to discuss it, I will be publishing a whole course about it. So let's start now with the first lecture and let me introduce you to the software I use to create my e-mail marketing systems. While you can use other softwares or other apps that I think that this one is the best one and on the market for many reasons. And I prefer, and I recommend that you use it. So the software I use, It's called the Clavier. And in order to install MATLAB on your store and linkage your store, you just have to install the app via the Shopify App Store. And you have to go to Google and search for how to integrate Clavier with Shopify. And the Clavier has a very detailed tutorial about how to link that to platforms together. It's a very straightforward procedure. I'm not going to repeat it in here because there are caveats story, it is more than enough. So let's say you have already installed the Cloud you on your store. Now in this lecture, I'm going to walk you a little bit through that lab, you dashboard. And later on through this course, we are going to discuss each part of the things you will find in heat and how to use them. So this is the Clavier. In here. You find your dashboard, which means you find your performance if you already have stored and you already are already receiving traffic and making sales in here, you can follow up with your results. If you move in here, you can find more detailed analytics. In here you can find Analytics related to your lists and segments and we are going to discuss this later on. And in here you can see the activity feed, which means you can see the alive activity on your store. Okay, this dashboard, It's very important when you start collecting traffic and making sales because it shows you the results on your store. So this is something that you will be following up by running your store and why and why monitoring good email marketing system in order to know what's working and what is not working. From dashboard, we move into campaigns. Campaigns, as I told you before at the image we send manually from time to time, whether to announce a new blog posts or maybe a pre-launch, or maybe a sale or so on. So in here you create campaigns. In here you have the flows. The flows are the sequence of emails we have talked about in the previous lecture. They are sequence of email sent automatically, are triggered by some action that happens on your store. Maybe when someone's subscribe to a newsletter, maybe when someone in shaded checkout and didn't complete and to purchase and so on. And here you have the image templates and those are templates to create for your main marketing. These are the templates created by default, by Clavier. However, there are other templates that you can explore and we are going to see them later on this course. Here you have your lists and your segments. So here you collect your lists and here you can create segments. I'm also going to talk about the difference between lists and segments. The upcoming lectures. Here you can see all of your profiles which mean, which means everyone who ever gave you their e-mail before. Okay, so here you can see what's happening on your store directly. And you have to know that Clavier shows you a live preview, which means you can see directly you is live on your store. Here you can track your analytics, which means everything related to your numbers and so on. And here you can manage the enter integrations, which means if you want to integrate Clavier with Shopify, you go from here and this is something have you shows you inside of the how to set up Clavier with Shopify integration. Here you have the coupon codes. And as you recall in one of the lectures, I have talked about the difference between dynamic and static coupon codes. Clavier allows you to create dynamic coupon codes. So if you are running, if you are, for example, creating a newsletter and you are offering a discount for people who subscribe to their newsletter. The discount can be created for each of your customers separately and each discount code can start on the date someone signs up and ends maybe one week or three days after they sign up at depends on how we set up the coupon code. That's what we call a dynamic coupon codes. And this is something you can create using Clavier. Here you have the sign-up forms and these are the forms I have talked about previously in this course. So if you want to create a popup form and embed form, a fly and form. This is where you do it, also does something we are going to discuss later. And here you have the pages that preferences pages for some lists. And I don't use those very much, but sometimes you might just use those. If, for example, you are running a giveaway on Instagram and you're trying to collect your customer's e-mails. This might be a way in here you have your asset library, which means your uploaded photos and so on. And in here you have that x. I personally, I think that tags are for a more advanced. Densities may be when you have a very big marketing system and you have a very big list. But for now, I prefer to use this and segments to differentiate my profiles. I don't use tags usually, so you can skip it for now. So this was a very, very quick introduction into Clavier and upcoming lecture. I'm going to start discussing each one of these with you in order to experience you more, how you can use them in order to set up your email marketing system. So stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 49. Klaviyo: Sign up Forms , Lists and Segments: Hi there UB are again instead of Clavier. And I'm going to start by talking about how to create your sign-up forms because this is where you start collecting your customer's e-mails, your customer's needs. And this is where your e-mail marketing starts. So in here you go onto sign-up forms and in need we can create different kinds of sign-up forms. Okay? These are by default given by Clavier. I'm going to ignore them and I'm going to start by creating a sign-up form. Okay? The most important thing about Clavier or the most funny thing, a particular view actually is that whenever you create a form in here, it's directly live on your store so you don't need to worry about implementing anything else. This is something very nice and it makes your life way, way easier. So in here you can filter by type, which means if you want to show a pop up or a flyout or an embed, the difference between a pop out and fly out is that a pop-up is much like aggressive. It's the one that shows directly when someone lands on your store or about to leave. It's someone that covers the screen. Layout is the one that comes in the corner below. So it doesn't, it's not that aggressive as above up, but it doesn't have the high conversion rate as the pop-up because the pop-up is very direct, like it's in front of people. The embed code to embed form is the one you see embedded inside of your homepage or on any page or on any page jewish. Here you can choose to filter by device, whether you want a pop up That's better for desktop or mobile only or for both. And in here you can decide what, what is your goal? Are you announcing something or are you capturing your email list and so on. I'm going to start by choosing, by choosing the, for example, that pop up type. And I'm going to choose this one. I usually prefer to always create two different versions of the same pop up, one for mobile and desktop, because I think that the two screens are totally different. So it's better to create two versions. And I'm going to show you how to do that. Although I'm choosing to see the pop-ups that work for both, I can, when I'm editing that pop up, choose where to show it. So let's say I'm going to start with something as simple as this one. For example, I usually prefer to have n dimensions that of the pop-up for desktop. However, for mobile, I removed the image and I keep only the text to make that pop up the biggest possible detects the biggest possible. So the name of this book, you can name it as you wish. For example, I'm going to say to him at 12 Compton and let's say for example, this is a popup I'm going to show on my story to tell my, my customers that I am offering 10% discount for people who subscribe to my newsletter. And here I'm going to choose their list where this, these images will be saved. Okay? I usually save all my images inside of my newsletter. Okay, so I save all the images inside of the newsletter list. And this is the list that will be, I'll be in touch with because those are people who agreed to receive image from me because they agreed to sign up to my newsletter. Okay. And I'm going to click on Create form. And don't worry, everything in here can be also changed inside of the editor, nothing is find it. So here I am inside of the attitude and now this is my pop-up. Okay? So this is the popup and this is a success message. When someone signs up to the pop-up in here, you can decide to add blocks inside the papa, for example, let's say I want to add an additional texts. I can do it from here. Or if I want, for example, to change the existing texts, I can't change it from here. Okay. I usually prefer not to ask my clients or my traffic to enter a lot of details because I want to minimize the friction. Order to minimize the friction, I try only to ask about their emails and I skip the name, so I remove this one. And I keep that. And I keep only the image. Now, I want to change everything to be suitable with my brand. So I go in here to Styles and I start changing things. So for example, the type of this book of this form is pop up. I came in here, change it to fly out if I wish, which means it will be showing you on the corner. I can even choose where the fly-out will be seen. I will keep it like that and I can choose to embed this form. This is a popup form and I want it to be a form, so I'm going to keep it like that. And here I can change the size whether I wanted medium, large, or minimum. So I'm going to keep, keep at large because this form was designed in this way. In here you can change the background color and the images for sure. You need to change the image to apply image, an image from your store, and that colors it depends on your store design. I prefer to give up a color that pokes out. So it's like a certain color or you give it wide, depends on your design and how you want that up to look like. In here, you can choose how to show the image. Do you want it to cover? You want to keep it customer, which means you change the width. Or to keep it contained, I recommend you to always start with a template that looks the most like the pop up you want to have. Because this way you will make editing the pop-up way easier, okay, in here you can choose the alignment, the overlay color over the image and so on. And then here you can modify the remaining sides, for example, that borders the input field, text, colors and so on. I'm not going over all of these. They are very simple and you can modify them yourself. And I recommend you to change the fonts to meet your brand's fonts. This for sure something you have to do if you don't find your font inside of your Clavier, of Clavier fonts. Pick the font that looks closer, the closest possible to your phones. Go into behavior in here and here you decide how this pop-up will be showing and this is something very important. So do you want to show it immediately on page load? This is something I don't recommend to do. I recommend to show it with delay, for example. You can show it when someone is existing that page, which means instead of creating a welcome, welcome pop up, you will be creating an exit intent pop-up. This is something I recommend you to do. You can create a exit intent pop-up instead of the welcome pop-up. Or you can create both. Can create welcome from up and an exit intent pop-up. And here you can decide to so a 60 seconds after page load. And you can show it, for example, after loading, after scrolling for 60 percent percent on the page, because you want to make sure that you are not showing up directly when someone lands, you want to make sure that they get and they were able to add a little bit, gets a minute whether your brand before asking them to subscribe to use debtor. And here you can decide how much frequent you want this book up to show. And here you can decide where to show that to pop up, whether on desktop only or on desktop and mobile and so on. And in here you can decide to show it to all visitors and not to show it to existing Clavier profiles with something I recommend you to do, to do because you want to collect a new email. You are offering a gift for first-time purchaser purchases. So you need to only show it for people who didn't already gave you their email. So you want to show, to pick this, don't show it to existing Clavier profiles. And in here you can decide where to show it and and by location as well. Well, concerning the URL, sometimes I, for example, I show a pop-up on the blog post up on the homepage, I'm going to tell you why. So let's say for example, on the whelk, on the homepage, I'm collecting my new customers leads, okay, but I want to show a pop-up for my old customers, for example, asking them to fill out more information about them. Let's say I want to know if my customers are female or male, or maybe if I want to know the birthdays of my customers in order to send them gifts on their birthdays, I would be showing a pop-up for my already existing customers and ask them to fill out their birthday, for example, or their sex or their gender and so on. In this case, I will be showing, for example, that pop up on my blog, post that on my homepage, and so on. So this is something you can use if you are thinking about taking this a little bit further and like implementing more targeting depending on the behavior of your customers. So after you modify your subscribe form, you go into heat and you modify your success message and you click on Publish. If you want to publish this, pop up and it will be directly published on your store directly. You don't need to do anything if you have integrated the Clavier and Shopify expert editorially provided by Clavier. You can directly see the pop-up on your story. However, here there is something very important that I need to tell you about. And it is to create A B testing, it's very important to always create different versions of your pop-ups and to test which one is performing better. Let's say for example, I'm wondering if a 10 percent discount is better than 10 dollar discount used many, many people say that that dollar count is much more attractive than the percentage count. Others say the opposite. So you have to test, I always test my pop up and my offers in order to see which one works better. So for example, if I'm wondering between 10 percent and €10, I ran two different pop-ups. One with 10 percent discount, one with €10 discount, and then, and I see which one performs better and declare view, do very good job and to running the tests and showing me with a percentage which one is working better. Also, you can, for example, test different colors, different messages, different offers, and so on. So as much as you want, you can test as much as you want. The most important thing is to always keep testing because in this way, you will be able to optimize your system and get the best results ever. So after you save the popup and you publish it, it will be live on your store. And this is it. Let me exit this. So now that we have created our sign-up forms, we are starting to collect our customers. It's so these seeds are saved inside of our lists and segments. They are actually saved inside of our newsletter list. Here you have to know the difference between lists and sediments. Lists are static, which means when we add image to them, the images are there and they don't go anywhere unless we remove them or are less than and subscribe to our newsletter and so on. However, segments are dynamic, which means I can create a segment for people who, for example, opened my email amaze in the last three months, which means segments are always updating because the condition is dynamic, it's not static. So for example, I can create segment of people who bought a certain product from my store and I can target them. So let's say for example, I have a sneaker which was virgin two. And now after two years, I'm starting, I'm launching the version three of the same sneakers. What they can do in this case is to send a news, a campaign for people who both the version 2 of the sneakers and tell them that they have now aversion tree. In order to do that, I should be able to create a segment of people who bought a version two of the sneakers. And this is what we can do inside of lists and sediments. We create segments depending on dynamic behavior, on customers behavior. This is what makes Clavier very strong because when you create segments, you can make sure that you are targeting your customers depend, depending on how they are behaving. And this will increase your conversion rate because you are making the connection much more personal. So let's say for example, you are contacting people who, for example, both three times from you and you are offering them a gift. In this case, you are making the connection much more personal. If you are contacting people on their birthdays and sending them gifts, you are creating a very personal connection with your customers. So let me show you how you can create segments. You can create unfettered kind of segments on Clavier. I'm going to show you one example and it's up to you to go there and research and create as much segments as you wish. So you go in here and you click on it, create segments, and you choose to create a segment. And in here we'll name the segment. I recommend you to name the segment with something that makes sense because in this way, you make it easier for yourself to understand what's going on. Let's say, for example, I want to create a segment about my customers who are located in France because I want to send them a newsletter and French, not an English. So let me call it for example, france customer, French customers. I go in here and I choose between those. I came, for example, what someone has done or not done properties about someone, if someone is or not within, for example, this is something you knew someone's proximity to allocation if someone is in or not analyst and so on. So I want to target depending about a property of, property about someone. So what is the dimension that I mentioned, for example, is the country and I want the country to be equal to, for example, I have only these two options. Let's say I pick this one and this is if I click here on Create segment and the club, you will be creating this segment for me. Now let's say for example, I want to create a segment about for people who have both several times from me. So I would create what someone has done or not done. Here, for example, I can choose placed order, at least, for example, is atleast, for example, three times. And it this way I'm creating a segment of people who have both for me at least three times and at best. Now let's say, now let's say I want to filter this segment more. I can create a filter in here, or I can create an end condition, which means that both conditions should be verified. If I create an end condition, it means that condition 1 and condition 2 should be verified. If I create an OR condition, that means either the condition one or condition two should be verified. And this is how you work with your segments. So this is it for this lecture. We have discussed the sign-up forms and the list and segments. And the next lecture we are going to talk about coupon codes and B are going to talk a little bit about campaigns. So stay tuned and meet me there. 50. Klaviyo: Coupon Code and Email Templates: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And we are healed back again inside of view. And in this lecture we are going to discuss the coupon codes and the inmate templates concerning the coupon codes. I have told you before that club you allows you to create dynamic coupon codes, which means you can ask love you to create a unique coupon code for each of your customers when they subscribe to a newsletter. So let's say for example, now I went to your store, I subscribe using that pop up that you have created in the previous lecture. Now clave, you will be creating a separate unique coupon code to me. And we'll be sending this coupon code via email to my email address. So here I can create, click on create Shopify, coupon. And in here I can choose the coupon. I recommend you to choose a name that makes sense. I usually pick, for example, while content. In here, you choose the prefix, which means it's the part that we'll be showing inside of your customers, of the email you sent your customers. So let's say for example, I'm sending welcome tan. If I wrote in here, Welcome tend your customers will be seeing first this. Welcome them. I usually do the following. Welcome 10 club. You will be adding year that unique code for each of your customers. So the total coupon code will be this whole section in here centered customer, that prefix plus the unique number Clavier gave to your customer. So let's say for example in here I'm offering fixed amount and it has $10. In here. I can apply it on entire order, on specific products or on specific collections. I'm going to keep it on entire orders. I'm going to activate it at same time and this is what I was telling you about. So I'm going to activate it at some time and I'm going to keep it active for seven days, for example, or for three days. I guess three days is enough. Usually in here, I prefer to setup a minimum purchase required because if I'm offering $10 for my customers as a gift and if I have some accessories on my soul who are, for example, $15 or $20. I don't want my customers to use the coupon code on these small purchases because in this way, it wouldn't be profitable for me. So what I would be doing in here is that to precise that this offer, for example, is only applicable for orders above, above $100 or maybe $90 and so on. It depends on your business. And in here I click Create Coupon. So now, so now whenever someone subscribe to a newsletter, he can receive this coupon code, which is Welcome 10, and you will be receiving this coupon code like this. Welcome ten, dash the special number Clavier give to each customer. Okay, now I'm going to show you how later on I'm going to show you how to set up the image that would be sent to your customers once they have signed up to your newsletter. So don't worry. So now you go in here to e-mail templates. I'm going to talk a little bit about those. So usually Clavier. Give you some image templates to start with if you wish to. I prefer to start with with nothing with that draft and create my e-mail templates myself in order to use them later on. But the e-mail templates are templates, which means you can, if you create, for example, 10 templates in here, you can, whenever you want to create a campaign or airflow, get one of these templates and embedded inside of your campaigns and inside of your flows, you will not be changing when you embed a template inside of campaigns and flows, you will be changing that template inside of the campaign and the flow that original templates will not be touched unless you go into image templates and you change them. Okay? So let me here, for example, won't, let me, for example, start with a basic template. By the way, these are templates Clavier create based on my brand. He added, he adds the logo, things like that. I'm going in here and I'm going to click, for example, one of these. Let's say for example, I'm choosing this template and I'm going to name it, for example, template one. And I'm going to click on Create template. So this is a default template given by Clavier. You can modify everything in here. If you want to remove a section, you can go in here and remove it. If you want to duplicate a section, you can replicate it from here. Or you can, for example, edit your favorite. If this is something that you use commonly between your e-mails, you can add it as a saved block for one of your, for your future emails. Okay? In here, when you click on an element, you can modify it. For example, here you can modify the logo or the attacks and so on. And in here you can modify the style of the element, okay? You are selecting, if you are not selecting anything. So for example, like this, you are, you would be changing the styles. And here you would be changing the style of the whole email. If you scroll down in here, you can change, for example, the mobile settings. You can change the text size on mobile and so on. And you can change the general things about your emails in here. You can preview this email whether in here directly on Clavier or by sending an email to your email address. And in here, you can start to add blocks to your email. So if you want to add a text or to other animals and so on, You add them from here. If you want to change a tax to click on it. And here, and we change that x. Well, these, for example, this a, this is a code that's provided by Clavier and that allows you to embed the name of your customer. So if you look, for example, in the tide of your newsletter, you are inside of your newer letter popup. You are asking your customers to fit in main and e-mail address. You can inside and here, add the image. So for example, if I have signed up to your newsletter, I have entered my email, which is the hub, for example, in here in that e-mail when I receive that he made it will be showing like that. Glad you are here for their ivory hub. The moment a customer signs that, blah, blah, blah, blah. So this is something important because it makes the main much more personal. And usually people, when they find their name inside of the image, I feel like the email was written precisely for them. So these are things that you can do if you are more advanced in main marketing, I usually don't collect my customers and aids. I prefer to lower the friction to the maximum, so I only ask them about their e-mail addresses. But you can do that if you think that your customers will be willing to give you their firstName, do it. And even you can split test between pop up with a two forms, which means names and e-mails and pop-ups with only their email address required. Before finishing this, you have to always make sure that the mobile view is good so you have to check it out. I recommend you to use a tool, send ap bu email to the email address and to check the mobile view on your own cell phone because sometimes clear view doesn't give a very good mobile. If you, I usually do that. I send an email to my email address and they check it on my mobile phone to make sure that everything looks great. Also, each of these elements can be, for example, seen on desktop only or on mobile only or on boats. So if something doesn't look good on mobile, you can, for example, hided from mobile and keep it on your own desktop, and so on. After you've finished creating good emails, it's a very simple drop and drag and drop editor. After finishing that, you go in here to save and return to templates. And now you have your first tab click. Okay, we use these templates to send campaigns and to say it flows. For example, let's say we have a template dedicated for holidays. We can, on each holiday use the same template and modify it to match the holiday. For example, Valentine's Mother's Day, Black Friday and so on. Okay, so in here I recreate your templates and you use them later on, inside of your campaigns and inside of your flows. So this is it for this lecture and the next lecture, I'm going to talk about campaigns and flows and how to create them, sustains me and meet me there. 51. Klaviyo: Campaigns: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to talk about campaigns, how to create them, and how to modify them. So let's start. You're going here to campaigns and you click on Create Campaign. And he chose e-mail because we are doing email marketing and you click on Create Campaign. After creating good campaign here you have to name your campaign. I recommend you to give it a name that makes sense because it would be easier for you to follow up with the results. Let's say I'm going to run a Mother's Day campaign. Inside of recipients you choose to whom you are going to send this campaign, let's say you want to send them to your newsletter or maybe to a specific segment that you have created as we have seen in the end one of the previous lectures. So let's say I want to send it to all of my newsletter. And after choosing to whom I am going to send this e-mail, I can choose to exclude some people, let's say I want to exclude people who have purchased in the last two months. I can do that in here. Let's say I'm running a sale and I don't want my the people who have purchased in the last two weeks to receive an e-mail about the sale because I don't want them to cancel the orders and order something in you. So what I would be is to exclude my previous purchases or people who purchased in the last two weeks to create a segment for people who purchase in the last two weeks, I can go to segments and create a segment in here. Then I can go in here and exclude this segment. And here you can skip people who have received e-mails in the elastic seen hours. There's something I usually do because I don't want to like, send too many e-mails for the same people. I don't want them to get frustrated from my emails. So I always keep this ticked on. So in here you can add UTM tracking if you are doing UTM tracking, I'm not going to do that. I'm going to click on Continue to content. So here I have named my campaign. I have chosen the recipients of my campaigns. I have excluded the people I want to exclude. And now I'm going to set up the campaign. So this is the sender name and this is the one that we'll be showing inside of the e-mail. This is that contact the sender e-mail address. So this should be your professional email address, your brand professional email address. In here you have the subject and the preview text. The subject, if you use, for example, the e-mail's provided by the Windows Office. When you see a popup of the image coming, you have the subject line and the preview aligned behind it. Inside of your inbox, you have the subject line and the preview line under it. So in here you piss off the subject and then here you prefer precise the preview text. You have to pick a subject line that's very catchy because this is, this is one of the things that will increase your operate, your email operates. So you have to pick a attractive subject and everything that you couldn't put inside of your subject line should be inside of your preview text because your customers will be able to see both. So you have to pick a, an attractive subject line and an attractive preview text. And you make, you want to explain to your customers exactly what you are offering inside of this campaign. So for example, let's say I'm offering a discount code for Mother's Day. For example, I can do something like that. Happy Mother's Day. 20% off on everything in that preview text, for example, I can say, pick the perfect gift for your mother or yourself. Something like that, then you save changes. Okay, so choosing good subject line and the line is actually very important. And you can do split testing A, B testing when it comes to the subject and the preview text inside of cavea as well. So after finishing that, so after finishing that, we move on in here into creating our image. Here you can choose between doing a text on the main, which means to create a text-based email. This is something usually very good for open rates because text-based e-mails usually end up on the inbox dot on the promotion folders. So people often them more. So I recommended to always do both like sand, text-based emails and said send e-mails with images, see which one performs better and go with the ones that performs better for you. I usually try always to include both types of images inside of my campaigns and flows and so on. So I use text-based image, which means the males where I have big paragraphs. One image maybe or maybe 0 image, because those images, as I told you before and end up inside of the inbox folder, not until all the promotion folder, but I also use the more professional templates with the images and so on. Sometimes two signs because they also perform good and people like them. So you have to test and see which ones perform. Performance, perform better for you. So I'm going in here and I'm going to choose to select a template. Which means I will be selecting a template from one of the templates that I have created. Okay, so in here I have my template. Let's say I'm selecting this one. So now I am changing the image. You have to know that I'm not changing the template. I'm changing the campaign. So i 1, I select a template, Clavier creates a copy inside of the campaign I'm creating. And when I change in here, I will be changing inside of the campaign, not inside of the template, okay, So in here that your template will remain preserved, it will remain untouched. When I change in here, I'm changing inside of the campaign. Okay, So in here I should be changing this campaign to fit with what I'm, what I'm offering. So for example, if I'm offering 20% discount, I should be offering this discount in here and I shouldn't be adding an image elated to Mother's Day and so on. And I include also my coupon code and everything. And I tell, for example, my customers that this offer is only available for three days or something like that. And when I finish everything, I click on Save content. And now my campaign saved and it is ready. After finishing everything in here, you click on Review and sand campaigns. But before that, if you want to create AB test, so for example, if you want to test different subject lines, different templates, or if you wanted to test, for example, between a text-based email or, or any mail like that. You can do it in here by creating AB testing, okay? And you click here on Review and Sam campaigns. And in here, Clavier will tell you if there's a problem with you in May. And after doing that, you click here on schedule or sense, or you can schedule your e-mail or you can send that now and so on. This is it. Okay, I usually recommend you to always create, whenever you want to create a sale, to send two campaigns at least. So if you are creating three days sales, you send an email and the first day telling your customers about the sale. And he made on the third day reminding them that they only have one day until the essays ends. And if you don't mind, I would even recommended send a 3D maze like animate each day. But in each e-mail you should be providing value. Not only talking about the sale, you should be talking about the value behind your products and why your customers should be buying your products. Okay, So this is it. This is it for the campaigns. And the next lectures we are going to talk about the flows and how to create them. So stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 52. Klaviyo: Flows: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. And this lecture we are going to talk about flows and how to create them. So as I have said before, flows are automated sequence of emails you send to your customers depending on some kind of behavior they have done on your story. So let's stick with the welcome pop-up and let's see how we can create a flow for people who have signed up to a newsletter. So you're going here to flows. You create a new flow. And here they are. They have like some default flows that you can start with and you have the welcome series. Usually this is something similar to what we are going to do. So I'm going to start with it and I'm going to click on Edit Flow, this sequence of images, Santo and someone subscribe to our newsletter so that trigger is subscribe to our newsletter. And as you can see here, we are sending multiple images one after the other. When someone subscribes, I usually recommend you to create at least three to four MAs. And the first email, you send them a coupon code you have promised in the second image. Maybe after one day, you tell them about one of your products, like you focus on one of your products and you tell them why this product is, for example, very essential, why it is very good. What are the benefits behind this product? You can also send an email, show testimonials of your customers or things like that in order to enforce social proof and to cut to subscribers to buy from you. And then a third e-mail, you remind them that the discount code is about to expire and that they should be acting fast. Welcome flows work very well and they bring you a lot, a lot of sales. So you have to always set up and I welcome. I went home flow in here. You after that trigger which you subscribe to the newsletter you have the first email you have sent. So they have a default email that you can edit from here if you wish, and why editing, you can choose one of your templates from here, or you can start from scratch. I'm not going to do to go over that. It's the same thing we have done for the campaign. Okay. So is that you set up your first e-mail. Then in here you, besides the delay between the first image and the second email and so on. So as I said before, I recommend you to have at least four image or PMAs on your welcome sequence. With the same logic, you create your welcome series, you create your abundant car series, which created abundant checkout cities and so on. You have the wind bag, the early Bay birds, many, many flows that you can create depending on your customers behaviors. To change that triggers you go in here and you choose different triggers from here. You can also choose to filter this trigger. For example, if you want to, to make someone leave the floor, if they have purchased, you can add a target and a filter in here doing that and so on. And then order to activate the floor, you go in here and you click on make it live, or do you update each one of these men to be alive? And at this way, you are, flow will be working and it will be showing you it will be the new sales and sales. So you can create very complicated flows using Clavier. And I'm going to show you some flows are usually create on my on my email marketing system. So to get an idea about what you can do exactly in here. So here's an example of a welcome flow that I have setup for one of my clients. In here we have that triggered, which is when someone subscribe to our newsletter. And then here we have the filters because people who have placed orders and people who have been shaded check-out will be removed from this flow because people who have placed orders will be moved to the post-purchase flow and people who have a shielded check-out will be moved to the abundant cart flow. So their place is not here. That's why we are filtering that triggered by these two conditions. And in here we have the different images. As you can see, the first image is the one that makes most of the sales because it's the one providing the offer. If you scroll down in here, you can see, for example, that this image is also making sales, maybe small sales, but you have to know that not on images and meant to make sales. Many images are meant to enforce your connection with your customers and to enforce your brand in the mind of your customers. So this is our welcome flow. So even in the mail five bars then making a little bit of money and so on. That's why creating a flow, a big flow is very important in order to enforce their relationship with you and your customers. And addition to welcome series, you can create other flows like for example, post-purchase, flawed, abundant card flows, and so on and so on. And listen to the welcome flow that I'm any other flaws that you can create. For example, this is an example of a post-purchase flow and it's meant for people who have already bought from us. And it's a little bit complicated, but it's very important. It doesn't bring says because it's not meant to blink says it's meant to enforce a connection with your customers. It's meant to make them follow us on social media and make them send us user-generated content like testimonials and videos and so on. So another example, another example of flows that you should be creating is the abundant cart flow. And as you can see, also a little bit a big flow. But it's brings a lot of sales. It brings a lot of sales because it's meant for people that have left their items and didn't buy. So as you can see, the first e-mails make the most. But if you scroll down and here you can notice that all of the images are making sense and they are making money. So these are the basic three examples of flows that you can create. However, if you want to take your business to the next level, you should be creating much more flows and you should be aiming to create a very personal connection with your customers. Some examples of that, you can send VIP flows, you can send birthday flows, and so on and so on. The more you go deeper and talk into targeting your customers via e-mail marketing, the best results you will get, the more you segment them all you target your customers, but depending on their behaviors, the better results you will get. So this is it for the flows. I hope that this lecture and the previous one will help you to start setting up your email marketing system, does it for this lecture and this is a topic of how to retain your customers via e-mail marketing. Stay tuned with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 53. Introduction to Omnisend: Hi there and welcome to this lecture and this lecture and then they're coming ones. I'm going to show you how to use omniscient omni sand as an e-mail marketing software that allows you to create your email marketing system, to send campaigns, to set up your flows, to set up your forms, to collect the maze and so on. In this lectures and they're coming ones. I'm going to show you how to use it, all, the details about it. And I need to mention that Omni sound is very user-friendly. So if you are a little bit like not a tech person, or you feel a little bit like confused when the software you are using. It's a little bit complicated. I highly recommend you to check on this and it's super user-friendly. It offers a lot of options and features like creating landing pages, creating forms, creating all the flows are the campaigns. It's really a very good software and I was really happy to create these lectures about it. So from here, I need you to go to Apps, and I need you to search for Omnicell. And we will go to the Shopify App Store because we need to download the app in order to link and create. Actually, I would only send account. So from here I'm going to only send email marketing and SMS. And as you can see, it's an app with it, with a lot of reviews and the very high rating because it's a good one. So I'm going to click on add up, and I'm going to install it on my store. I need to create my account, so I'm gonna do that now. Once you create your account, you need to verify it by going to Gmail and verifying it. Okay. So I'm gonna do that to make sure that my account is verified in here, you need to start to fill out your brand assets. I'm talking about the logo, the colors, the fonts, your social links, and so on. This information will help Omnicell and why setting up your, let's say email templates to have everything in place and the first everything in place. So in here when you put your logo, you will have your logo in all of your mAs, when you put your colors, your buttons, your texts, we have the right brand color when you put the fonts, so on. So I'm going to select some colors, random colors. Let's say this one. For the dark, dark, I will keep the black and here I will choose this one, e.g. for the font, I will go with some fonts that I like. Let's see if they are available. So e.g. I. Might go with this one. Let's see, As you can see in here, you can see the preview. This is for the heading, this is for the text. Okay, let me go with something more fancy like this, e.g. and for the main text, I will go with something neutral, like e.g. Poppins. Okay, so now I have my headings, I have my texts, I have the button color. I can see the link color as I'm going to see it. And then here I need to upload my logo to make things better. So I'm going to select a logo and I'm going to upload it. Okay, let me upload something random. I will select my logo from here. As you can see, I can see it in here. So this is my logo, these are my brand fonts and colors and everything else. I can add the social media links. So Instagram, TikTok, everything else in here. As I click on Save brand assets and move to Omnicell and I must be selecting, I'm going to delete this one because I'm not going to add something and I will click on Save brand assets. So here I am inside of AMI sand. And as you can see, they are helping me by showing me the different steps that I need to be taking. So first, they need me to recover abandoned cars, which is the most important thing you can do with your email marketing because this is where you do your best to recover the lost sales. So those are people who are on your store at the two carts move to check out, but they didn't buy. Recovering these sales by following up through emails, maybe offering discount incentives to say if I think the objections may be offering free shipping and so on, this will help you to increase your conversion rate and to gain these last days. So this is the first thing they are recommending you to do. The second thing obviously is to create your welcome series, which is also one of the most important theories that you can have recreate because It's where you will be creating this connection with the new visitors to your store. So imagine you are paying on ads to drive traffic. People land on your store. And this is it. You don't have any other way to reach back to them unless you pay again on the ads. But if you have MA marketing and you have captured that in May, you can always email. You can always stay in touch with them, contact them, send them, offers this, a blog post, maybe articles and so on to keep this conversation going. So creating a welcome flow is also very essential. And honestly, the welcome flow is the one flow that will bring you most of the money because it's for new commerce. Then you have the collect subscribers, which is a very important step because you're welcome flow will be working unless you have something to collect your customers. Leads, whether we are talking about e-mails or maybe phone numbers. In all cases, you need a form to collect these needs and you need to offer them something and they turn off their lives. In addition to that, there are inviting you to send your first email, which is your first campaign, which is the single e-mail you sent your subscribers or to your list in order to maybe a launch a product, maybe launch your blog section, just contact them, maybe offer them a holiday discount or something like that. Okay, we're gonna go over all of these steps one by one. And I'm going to show you the importance of each one of them and how to do each one of them on Omni sand. But I really insist on the importance of doing this. Creating an email marketing system as something that you can't miss because it will help you to increase your conversion rate. And it will help you to retain your customers and increase the long life value of them. So instead of having one person buying from your onetime, you can keep them, you can keep them coming back to your store buying more and more from you in the future. Okay, and I'm going to click on, let's do this. I'm going to take you in here on us like small tool. Then after that, on the next lecture, we are going to start actually creating the system. So in here you have the dashboard, which is the, as you can see, this is the dashboard in here with the instructions they have for you. Then you have the campaigns and the campaigns. I repeat they are the e-mails you send intentionally weekly or maybe twice a week or maybe if it's Black Friday, you send multiple ones per week, the campaigns or the image descent without being triggered on customers behavior. So he sent them intentionally. I want to send this e-mail to all my list. You write the email, you send that down and you send it. Okay, The automation is different because these are emails you send based on the behavior or the things people did on your store. So you can send emails to people who abandoned products on their card, or people who just subscribe to your newsletter, newsletter, or people who checked some products and so on. So automations are based on customer's behaviors. Then you have automations. Automations are different than campaigns because automations are based on customer's behaviors, on things they have done, on actions they have took on your store. So e.g. a. Customer want your store subscribed to your form or subscribe to a newsletter via the form. In this case, they should start receiving good welcome series if someone e.g. at the two card and then why they shouldn't be receiving your abundant cartoonists and so on. So alterations are important because you set them once and that's it. You don't need to touch them in the future. You need to update them from time to time. But mainly they are, they are things that you sent them once and that's it. After automation you have the forms because in order to have everything running, you need to collect your customer's needs. And this is where you do it via the forums. And Omni sand offered a lot of options when it comes to forms. I'm going to show you all of this in the next lecture. After the forms you have, the audiences. And here is where you segment your customers via things here where you built your lists and so on. And after that you have the reports. And here where you see the results coming from your email marketing system. Okay? When you go to the dashboard, you will see that they are recommending you to do with these four steps and we are going to take all of them. But as well, you can see that we have the review in here to see that your sales, how much you have made, so on. Then here you have the live view to see what's happening currently on your stock. Okay, so stay tuned with me because in the next lecture I'm going to show you how to create your first form using omniscient. See you there. Bye bye. 54. Create Your Store Popus Using Omnisend: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. As I promised you in this lecture, we are going to start by creating the first asset of your email marketing system. And it is your newsletter form or You're welcome form. It's where you invite people to give you their leads, whether it is that e-mails or maybe their phone numbers and return of a certain offer, maybe a discount, maybe a gift, maybe to enter a giveaway, and so on. So from here you can either go to Forms and start from there, or you can go in here and start from launching signed up for. When I click in here on this end will be taking me to the editor. It's where I can edit my form, make it personalized my own business needs. Each business is different and the type of information you would need about your customers or your potential customers or your visitors will differ depending on your business. If e.g. you sell products that they are very sensitive, you might need to ask your customers e.g. about a certain date, let's say e.g. you said you said items that are related to weddings. Maybe you want to ask your visitors about when their weddings would be. So you would be like e.g. more cautious about the type of emails you send them or how frequent you send them, the email and so on. So you need to go in here and think about your business and what kind of information you need from your customers or from your visitors. And makes sure that you only asked for the most important information. The more information you ask, the more your conversion rate, your pop-up conversion rate will go down. People don't like to give you a lot of information. They don't have time and they don't feel very comfortable giving you a lot of their personal information. So just stick with the most important ones. Even if it means just asking for the image. I don't even ask for the name. I just asked for the images later on when they become customers, I will I will already have their names. If not, I can later on collect this information through maybe a giveaway or something else when they have a better incentive, a bigger incentive of giving me more information. For now, stick with the most important information ever. In my case, I will stick with the image because it's fine. But in here, if you want to add more, you can ask for e-mail, you can ask for phone number, you can ask for the date. You can e.g. ask them to choose between two options. Let's say if you have a very large catalog and you'd catalog is divided between man and woman. And you want to have different emails sent to customers depending on their gender. So you can ask them about their gender. If you want e.g. to ask them about maybe if they likes a certain type of e.g. food, if you sell food, maybe you want to divide your less between people and vegetarian People. Are we good people and non-vegan people? In this case, you might add a drop-down or a radio button to collect this information. But again, only asked for the most important things, the most crucial thing for your business. Nothing more. You want this pop-up to collect your customer's needs. And so you want to make sure that the conversion date of this pop-up or of this form is high. You can only do that by making sure that your offer is very good. Second, by making sure that you are only asking for the most important information. So here I will be just giving you some examples just to a little bit, get used to all this and you can in here drag the stacks like this. And as you can see, it's super user-friendly. I can type in here. I didn't think I wish e.g. join our family because I like to give the welcome flow like a, let's say a community feeling. So I usually say join the family, join the clubs, stuff like that. So I'm going to click on this. The size is too small, so I'm gonna make it bigger. Maybe in here, I will make it e.g. let's try 17 or 18. And as you can see by default, Omnicell and chores, my font, which is the one I have precise and the first in the previous lecture, which is Poppins. And in here I would click on update. I can change the padding if I wish, but I'm not gonna do that. Also, I can click in here, and also I can add a link if I wish, I can make it bold. I can maybe change the alignment of the text and so on. I'm not gonna do any of this if I want to duplicate this small section here, the only thing I need to do is to click here on Duplicate. I want to delete it. I click in here ON delete. Also in here, you can change the color if you wish. I'm gonna stick with this one for now. And you can even enter your own hacks. So if the color you want is not from here, you can enter the column number and you will have your own color in here. Okay, So this is for adding a text. If I want to add an image, I can also drag it and drop it in here, and I can add an image. Okay, Same idea. I upload the image, I change it, blah, blah, blah. I'm not gonna do that. I'm going to talk about the wheel of fortune in few seconds. But first I want to show you in here the different layout options you have. So you can have the one column pop up like this one. Or you can have two columns layout. So in this case you will have items in here and items in here. You can have three columns. The first column is the mixed, mixed cleft that mixed right, and so on. I like to keep it simple so it's either one column or maybe mixed, right? If I want to have like a photo, an image in here on the pop-up in addition to the text. But that's it. Okay, I'm gonna keep this layout, but I want to tell you that if you want to check the mobile layout of this bubble up, you just need to click in here and you will see how it looks on mobile. So this is the form. I'm going to now show you how it behaves. So when you click here on the e-mail section, you will see the text within this within the sphere. So enter your email. You can change a few words. You need to make it required because unless, unless it's required, doesn't it doesn't fulfill the job you want it to fulfill. So you need to make the field required. It's by default required by, just keep this in mind, you need to add this message if you want to change it and so on. And here you can change the layout of this email, but we're not gonna do that. After designing good pop up, making sure that you have everything in here are the fields or the information you go in here. And you need to define the behavior of this pop-up when it's going to show how many, how often it's going to show how people can close it up to schedule it and so on. So first you have the audience management, and in here you can decide e.g. if you are going to show it to newcomers, to all customers and so on by default. By default, it's set up to be, to be seen for people who are like new subscribers. So form subscribers, so by default it will be sent to them so you don't need to change this. You can activate the enable double opt. And in this case, people, if they have signed up, they need to go back to that e-mail to verify that they have signed up. If it's not in here, if it's not ticked, people don't need to verify that image. Well, this is a tough decision to make because when you enable this, you make sure that you list is very clean because whoever signed up to your list needs to go back to their e-mails. They need to verify that they have signed up. And this will mean that your image to them will be landing on that inbox or promotions instead of landing on the junk. But my only concern about this is that when you enable it, it means that you are forcing people to take an additional step. It means that you are adding the friction and you are making your customers do an additional thing, which is usually bad for the conversion rate. People don't like to do funny things. They like to get where they have signed up for directly. So it's something that you can test. I usually turn it on on sleep because I like to have my lists clean. But so many people recommend to turn it off. It's an option, I guess that you need to test. It depends on your preferences and what you'd like to see. So going back in here, you need to, you can change the scheduling so when it is available. So let's say e.g. this is a Christmas pop up. You need to have it available e.g. in the two weeks before Christmas, one week after Christmas. You can schedule it in here. And here you have the display, and it's when you want this pop-up to show. And this is the most important thing about all the options in here. So you want to display it after someone visits a certain number of pair of pages. So it depends. So e.g. after they visit three pages, you show them the pop-up in this way you went, you will make sure that whoever is subscribing, subscribing is actually very interested about your products or on time on page. So how, how much time they have spent on page or on how far they scrolled. Like maybe they scored 60% of the page, 70%. Or when they are exiting on the exit intent. I usually like to have two pop-ups, one for that welcome and one for the exit. Because I need I like to add different texts for each pop-up. For the welcome one, I will be adding texts welcoming people for the exit one I will be telling them hold before leaving this as you'd offer ticket. Okay, so it's also not like every big issue because now we have the teasers and I'm going to talk about them later because using teasers, customers can at any stage open the desert and get the discount they have missed. I'm going to talk about this in a few seconds. So in here I'm going to choose time on page. I usually like to show it after expanding, let's say 20 s, it's a good 20/32. It's a good option. It's called that maybe 60 per cent. I guess this is very good. Going back after display, you have the targeting, so you want to have it. Where do you want to show it? You want to make it sure on certain URLs do not show uncertainty at as a peer on pages from out-of-stock products. So these are options that will define where you want to show you. Pop up. After that, you have that visibility. So do you want to show it on all my devices on mobile and desktop depends on you. So if e.g. you want to have a pop up with an image, you can have it on desktop, but on mobile you need to have a pop-up without an image because it's gonna be, it's gonna look very small if it has an image. So in this case, you can have one pop-up on mobile, one hop pop up for desktop. I used to do that actually having to pop ups. So you can do that if you wish. And after that you have the frequency. So how frequent you want your customers to see this? You want your visitors to see this pop-up every single day. You want to. Do, you want them to see it whenever they go to the store or maybe every two days, I guess every one day is fine. Sometimes I go to seven days, depends on the business and how pushy you want to be with it. But people can always close it. So maybe few years ago I would have put a seven days, But now I'm I'm more into like making them see it every single day and they can always close it. So it depends. Just test and see. Maybe your customers will feel that it's too much, it's too much push. It depends on also your brand identity and your identity as a business owner. Okay, so just put it in here. Just put in here your frequency, as I said, one day is fine, seven days is fine, 14 days is fine. But if you want to collect as many e-mails as you wish, putting one day is a good option. Okay, going back and here, I will talk about the wheel of fortune because I promised you the wiener fortune is this thing. Let me drop it in here. This is when you offer your customers a discount or let's say to play with you in order to get a discount. In order to use this one, actually, we need to move on to this layout where we have at least two columns. So that we'd have for fortune is when you promise your customers that this is a giveaway, you, they enter their email, they click on the wheel, they will get any of these options and you can set up the options in here. So you can offer e.g. ten per cent discount, five per cent discount, 15 per cent discount, 13, 13% discount. And then here you set up the probability of each option. Well, this is, this game is nice because you can have high discounts that will encourage people to enter the giveaway, to enter the game. Because if you have e.g. a. Pop up with ten per cent discount, That's it. It's a 10% discount. But if you have a fortune, you can go up to 30% discount and you can lower the probability of this option so you make sure that not a lot of customers are taking it. But seeing that they have this option of getting something 10-30% discount would push them, or we'll give them a bigger incentive to give you that leads and entered this game. So I don't usually use the wheel of fortune. And I don't think it works for every single business, so it depends on your business. If you sell items, e.g. gaming items, or if you sell things for baby e.g. or toys. Or maybe if your brand is a little bit funky, this is going to be working very good for you because it goes with your branding. But if you have a very fancy brand, I don't think that this actually nice to have because it's a little bit like not suitable for your brand. So think about your brand, about your brand identity and think if this is actually suitable with your brand identity. If you sell items for $300, if you have a very luxurious brand, doesn't make sense to have it, I don't actually recommend you to do. But if you have, if you sell things that they are funny, funky, or maybe not that expensive, if your brand has this feeling, the spirit, you can use it. So think about it, decide whether you are going to use it or not, depending on your brand and your brand identity and what your audience will like. And we'll see, Let's say suitable food brand. I'm gonna delete this one. So this is my pop-up. I'm going to actually enable it. So now we can see it on the store. So I have my pop-up enabled. Now when I go back to my Shopify store and they could click on View the store. It should be here. But we need to wait for the triggers. I have put 23 girls, which is spending, I guess 20 s on the homepage and scrolling 60%. So I'm going to scroll down. So this is my pop-up. Okay. It's in here. When I close it, it goes which is something but, but wait with me. Now I'm gonna go back to my firms and I'm going to show you how you can add that user. So I'm going to click on edit it after the form we have the sexes, which is the success message. Okay? I don't recommend you to add the coupon code within your success message. I prefer it if people go to the image, open the e-mails and take the coupon code from there. Because this means that they have actually showed that he made, provided that the Treasury mean that they have opened them. This will increase your deliverability. How often they would be deceiving your email on that, and books and so on. So I prefer to keep the discount code for the inmate part, but in here you can thank them. You can remind them to go to the to that e-mail to check the embarks, their promotions, all folders to make sure that they get their discount code. Okay, So this is the success message after that you have that cheated. This is the one that I was talking about. When you enable the teaser, your customers will be able to see something like this, to see this thing in here, to open that pop up again and you can style it so it can change the position, you can make it in humid. You can change the color. I'm not gonna change anything about it. I'm just going to make it live. Now when I I need to open a new tab. So now when I preview my store, I can see that pop-up. When I close it in here. I can see that either. So if I want to open it again, I can simply click and open it. So let's say I landed on the store, I saw that pop up. I wasn't interested about taking the offer. I closed it. Now if I'm like after a certain time, I'm interested about a certain product. I will click in here and get my welcome discount code. So this is for how you can create a uniforms using Omnicell. And as you can see, it's very straightforward, it's very user-friendly and you can create as many Welcome pop-ups as you wish depending on the time of the year, depending on the offers are having, depending on what you want to have. And again, asked for all types of information, whether they are asking you about mAs for numbers and so on. So that's it for this lecture and the next lecture we are going to talk about automations are flows, and I'm going to show you how to set them up. So stay tuned and let's meet in the next lecture. 55. Create your Autmomated Flows Using Omnisend: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. As I promised to end this lecture, I'm going to show you how to create flows or you'd automation emails using Omnicell. So again, either you go in here to automation and you start or from dashboard, it goes to your goal which is in here, I guess recover abandoned cart and you start from here. It's either here or here. I'm going to click start by creating the welcome flow. And in here, as you can see, you can decide what, what's the type of discount you want to offer your customers. So you can directly choose this from here it is 5%, 10% or 15%. I'm gonna go with 10% because this is what I usually do for most of my clients. And I'm going to click on Start Workflow. It's very important to note something that this discount, the amount of discount you offer will differ depending on your product prices, that type of bundles you have, that your average order value and so many things. So this is not something to take lightly and this is something that will affect so much you are pop up conversion rate. So keep this in mind while choosing good offer. Okay, I'm going to choose that 10% discount and I will click on Start Workflow. I will click on Continue. Now, when I go to automation, this is my first floor, which is the welcome flow. And as you can see, first email sent 1 min after the customer signs up via anomalies and sign up for, I'm going to click on edit and I'm going to show you how to change everything about this. Welcome papa, welcome flow. E.g. I don't want my customers to wait 1 min to receive the image. I want them to receive the main directly. So as you can see, this is the weighting the delay. This is that triggered. This is where this flow or these emails or being fired. So in here they have the delay I waiting 1 min before they fired the MAs. I'm going to make this zero so they don't need to wait any minute or immediately in here. So my customers will be directly on my visitors. Visitors will be directed receiving the e-mails once they have a signed up. And then here I have the welcome e-mail. For the welcome automation, I recommend you to have at least three emails. This is the list and the first email you give them the discount and the second email, you remind them about the discount and you tell them what about your brand. Then the third e-mail, you sent them, the last reminder, which is by this offered before it expires. Okay, so here you can change the content of the email subject line, the preview texts, the pre header, the sender name, the standard email, and so on. I will click here on Edit Content, change the content of this, to change the content of this email. So this is their logo. I have chosen the one I have uploaded in the first lecture where we have talked about Omnicell. And so this is my logo. This is the image title. So if it's a welcome email, like offering 1010 per cent discount, it could be e.g. Welcome to the family, gets you 10% discount off. Here you have the text. This is like a basic, a basic structure that Omnicell and gave you, but you don't need to stick to it. You can create any, any layout Jewish or k. In here you can add items, as you can see in the same way and the same logic we have added items to the form. And here you can add from your saved items. You save the items that say e.g. you have created this action and you like it so much, you can save it from here. Then once you save that, you will have it in here under the saved items, you can even say save layout. So if you like the layout of your email, you can save the whole layout. Then you have the header. If you want to change how you'd had her look like you have the hero image. If you want to add an image to start with an image at the beginning, I usually like to start with a heading, which is the message then with a photo. Because I want customers when they see the image directly know what this email is about. And the photo is always nice to visually remind them of your products and why they have signed up to store newsletter. You can choose between all of these items in here and put them. Okay, I'm gonna do that in few seconds. Then you have the image body. If you want to add something from here you can do. Then you have the product listing. It's where you list your items within your image, the products within your mAs. You have the image gallery if you want to add images, e.g. images from your Instagram profile of customers using your products are reading them or the views and so on. And then here you can change the footer. So let's start by first adding a hero image. So let's say I want this one in here. I would be deleting everything else, so I will delete this. I will delete this one. We'll actually. The discount in here, same as in here. Let me remove this. And then here as I can see, I have given them the expiration date and I have told them that it's limited in quantity having your items demanded and the quantity is very important because you increased scarcity, urgency, you push people to take the offer. Okay? I can also add my header from here. So let's say e.g. I want to have this header. I can have it. I will delete this one. What else? I will remove this section. I will maybe change the footer to something else. Let's say something like this. Okay. Okay. So I can choose whatever I wish about this email, like the appearance, everything from here, okay, Now when you click on these items one by one, you can start modifying them so you can upload your images, replace it at the link, everything else. For the code, it's directly generated by Omni sand, so I don't need to worry about it. It's a card discount and they are showing you the percentage, so it's 10% or maybe if you want it to be 20%, they will be modifying it. And you can apply it to all orders, to certain orders to a collection so on. You can even make it a fixed amount if you want to offer e.g. instead of ten per cent, $10, you can do it from here. You can change in here the expiry date of the discount. So when do you want to take Spire and you wanted to explain e.g. in three days, you changed from here. And in here you can change everything related to the button and so on. So as you can see, everything is customizable, everything is, can be personalized to your own business needs. Once this is done, you click on finished editing and you will have your email. Okay? You will have this image. You can if you wish, e.g. clone it if you want to create a second e-mail of this image so you can clone it and modify this e-mail and change how it looks, change the text and so on. Okay, It's also important to note that in here you have so many options that you can add to this flow. Let's start by the trigger and the trigger can be filtered. So you can add filters to trigger. Maybe decide if you want to exclude some people from your welcome flow. You can do it in here. In addition to that. And here you can add images, as we have seen before. You can add SMSs and you can add push notifications. So let's see, in your same pop up, you are asking people to give you the emails and the asking you are asking them as well to give you their phone numbers. In this case, you can mix up your flow between emails and as I'm acids and you can do all of this within this same flow, within the same platform in here by adding items from here. So you go in here, you add an SMS, you add on vacation and so on. There's actually an amazing feature because if you are doing all of these type of marketing, it's very nice to see how these marketing, how these e.g. messages or notifications are overlapping or if they are overlapping or not. Having everything in one place is amazing. This is a very good thing for Omnicell and I truly like it. Okay? And here you can have delays. If you want to add delays, you can tag contexts, a contact, contacts at a certain stage of your automation sequence if you wish, you can split. So if you want to split your, your automation between e.g. people who have purchased people who have e.g. a. Certain action or not that a certain action, you can use it. You can use the split. And let me show you when you drag it in here. It shows you the split split between two options, yes or no. I didn't hear you define that. So what's the rule? Contact properties? What's the conduct property is maybe the gender. So if you have e.g. divided your, let's say your list between male, female or something else. You can use gender if you have the city, maybe they added a tag and so on. You can, yes, you can use these or maybe you want to change and depending on that message behavior. So you can also change this from here that they open the email they have, they click, have they clicked on SMS and so on. You can also do, I'm going to remove the split because it's showing that it's strong. You can also do AB testing. So if you want e.g. to know if your customers e.g. are liking. Amazed with so many photos versus e-mails with a lock deck text. You can test this in here by creating a split test and creating two versions of the same email. So one with images, one with text, and you put the split test in here and you see which version is performing best. Okay, As I told you before, there are so many options that you can play around with. In here you can see your stats after publishing the automation and so on. Also, it's worth mentioning that if you want some help or you need some help, you can watch in here that video tutorial, like they have a video tutorial to help you out. And you can also check with them if you wish. Okay, So this is for that welcome flow. You need to do the same thing for all of your other sequences, for all of your other. Either automation. So we have the abundant cards, you have the post-purchase. So when someone buys from you, you want to follow up with them via email to tell them how thankful you are that they have both from you to make sure that they know how to use the product, to make sure that they leave positive reviews when they receive the product and stuff like that. Each of these automations that welcomed their post-purchase, the abundant card serve different purposes. The welcome is there to get to get you more customers and new customers. The post-purchase is there to make sure that your customers are satisfied with their experience and your abandoned cart flow is there to make sure that you are recovering your state. You lost taste as much as possible from your lost seats. So if you want to add a new workflow, clicking here on, Add a new workflow and you can choose between these options. So if you want to add an abandoned cart flow, you can add it from here and so on. And as you can see, you have so many options to choose from. The abandoned cart flow is very important because it brings your money, it helps us recover lost sales. So make sure to set it up. You click here on Create card, abundant workflow, and you just go with the same. Let's say mindset we have used for the welcome flow. Well in here there are also asking you if you want to offer a discount because this is something that recommended offering a discount for people who we're about to buy from you and laughed at the last stage is important because it helps you to recover this lost sales. Well, I don't recommend you to directly offer a discount for everyone. What you can do is to split between two test CFA 5% discount will work. If a zero per cent discount will work, see if you need maybe more than 5% discount. And depending on that, decide how you are going to set your automation flows. You are abundant cashflow. Don't take it for granted. Don't just like put it there and don't ask. I highly recommend you to test because it's very important. It's a very important series. It will bring you a lot of money if it was set up in the right way. Let's say e.g. let's say e.g. I want to split my I wondered cart flow between people who both who put e.g. more than $100 of item's value on that card and people who didn't put this, I will offer like e.g. the high card value, a discount directly, maybe the lower car's value, I will be offering them a discount after longer time, maybe after one day or 12 h. So what I would be doing is to go in here to split. And I will be splitting between two options. So I will go in here to trigger events and I will choose card sum, and this is gonna be e.g. $100 is greater than c, okay? In case the card sum is greater than $100, this means that my customers would be receiving this line of mAs. If it is lower than $100, they will be receiving this line of mAs when I set it up. So I can offer the people who have greater than $100 discount directly after 1 h. And I can offer these e.g. a. Discount maybe after 12 h, because to me these are the most important purchases because they have the highest card value. So this is just an example about how we can play around with this and make sure that your automation, you are abundant card flow is working in the best way possible. So this is how you create your automation workflows using Omnicell. And I hope that you liked this lecture. Make sure to stay with me because at the next section, I'm going to show you how to create your first campaign using omniscient. 56. Create your Email Campaigns Using Omnisend: Hi there and welcome to this lecture. In this lecture we're going to do the final thing. I'm saying sanders asking us to do this to create our first inmate campaign. You click here on Create inmate campaign. And as I said before, campaigns or e-mail that you send intentionally to pupil. So it's Black Friday, it's e.g. a. Christmas or maybe you are doing a summer sale or maybe you are launching a new product. Or maybe simply you want to stay in touch with your customers or to your list. So this is why you should be sending emails. You can paint image. They highly recommend you to send at least one e-mail per week. This is the only way that you can stay in touch with your customers. This is the only way that you make sure that they still remember you. They don't go to another brand. They still have you in mind when they think about buying the products present. So you started by defining your subject line. So let's say e.g. you are doing a behind the scene image. You are showing them that behind the scenes of your business to give them a feeling about how you create and so on. So it could, it could be e.g. one day in a life of a handmade business owner, let's say. And in here, their life and their life. For sure when you are thinking about this subject line, you need to make sure that you need to make sure that the subject line is attractive. Or e.g. could be e.g. one secret you don't know about how we create our products, or two things that you most probably didn't know about our products. Pick titles that will, that will stop people. Make them breed because you want people to read your email between all the other e-mails they have on their inbox. So having a good subject line is the very first thing that you should be doing. After that, you need to define your standard name, your e-mail for sure it's not good to use your Gmail needs to use your professional e-mail account. You can add a header, e.g. two secrets are three secrets. You don't know about e.g. extinct like that. Okay. After that, you can choose your campaign, the campaign name, it's for you so you can e.g. call it behind the scenes. Shy yellow one, anything that makes sense for you. And then you have the language. You can decide if you want to auto posted e-mail campaign to your Facebook page. I'm not gonna do that. And in here I have this Jimmy. Let's see. By the way, when you are setting up the information here, you can see a preview of how your email will look like in the inbox of customers. So as you can see, this is my email. So make sure that whatever you are putting in here is attractive enough to make them read through the mail. Once this is done, you click on Next step. In here, you can start customizing your image. We can choose between like the default template they have in here, it's Christmas time, that's why everything is Christmas in here. You can also use from safe templates if you have any safe templates and you get in here like choose by goals, but what's your goal? But I recommend you to do is to have one template and save it and always use it. In this way you will make your work easier. Okay, So let's say e.g. I'm going to use this template. You go in here, you set it up in the same way that you have set up the inmate within your workflow, within the welcome feel, e.g. and in here you go. This is the product grid if you want to take your own products and so on. And you click on, modify everything on it, and you click on Finish Editing. By the way, you can always send a test e-mail. If you want to check your email, check the e-mail on your, on your browser, on your mobile. I highly recommend you to do that because this is the only way that you will make sure that everything looks nice. Everything is clickable. Everything needs to the right direction. So make sure to always stand it. Estimate to click on everything. Makes sure that everything is clickable, that everything is leading to the right products, right message and so on. Okay, and you can hear, decide to save it as a template or to change them fleet, or to preview it and so on. Once this is done, you click on Finish Editing and you will have your campaign ready to be sent. Now you need to decide to whom you are going to send this email. Are you going to send it to all subscribers? Are you going to send it to a small, small amount of your subscribers? Maybe you want to send it e.g. for people, for all of your subscribers, unless the ones who both in the last few days. So you can do that by creating a segment for those people. You click on Next step and you just send your email, okay? You can also, you can also decide to schedule it for later. And this case, you need to schedule it by depending on your time zone or your subscribers times on. So if you want every one to receive your e-mail at 10:00 A.M. their time zone. You can do that by choosing this option in here. Okay, And finally, you click on Schedule Campaign before finishing up everything related to Omnicell and I need to talk about audiences and segments. Because as I mentioned and really creating the campaign, you can always e.g. exclude certain people from your campaigns. Let's say you are doing Black Friday now and you want to send an email to announce Black Friday, but you don't want to include customers who have bought in the last e.g. week because they already both without getting the discount, maybe they didn't notice that you are going to do a Black Friday sale. But anyway, in this case, what you can do is to go to segments. And under segments you can create a segment and you can create a segment of people, e.g. who behave a certain way. You can create a segment of people who placed orders, e.g. at least once and the last one week and so on. You can find all of these options in here. Well, in my case, because it's not an act of stored, not all of these options are actually available, but this is what you will have if you are linking your account to inactivate account, you can see e.g. people who viewed a product, people who placed a certain older people who paid for order or refunded order and so on. And you can segment your customers based on these behaviors. Actually, that is a very nice article about segmentations that I highly recommend you to check it out. If you are going to go through the slowed and you can find all the options that Amazon offers when it comes to segmentation. Segmentations are very important, especially when you add a little bit, a more advanced stage when your email list as big and you want to make sure that you are sending campaigns that are relevant to customers based on their journey, their journey with your brand. So it can send different campaigns, so newcomers and different campaigns to a VIP customers. The front offers e.g. to VIP customers. Maybe you want to do a VIP only discount and so on. So segmentations are very important. They will help you too, take your main marketing to a totally next level, but they are a little bit for a more advanced stage. So if you are just starting out, you don't need to worry about them. But later on at a certain stage, you need to start thinking about them as a way to increase your main marketing profit and increase the marketing ROI in janitor. So that's it for only sand and how to use it to create remain marketing system. I hope that you enjoyed this lecture and the previous ones stayed with me and let's meet in the next lecture. 57. Final Thoughts: Wow, you reach this lecture and this means one thing that you have finished the whole course. And this is awesome because it means that most of probably you liked it. And this means L autonomy. And this makes me very, very happy. So thank you for watching the Holocaust. And I want to insist on something that everything you learn on this course should be applied. Because then you apply everything on this course, you will be able to create a highly converting Shopify store for your brand. Now, before leaving, I want to invite you to follow me here on Skillshare, because in this way you will get notified each time I publish a new course. Second, I want to invite you to follow me on Instagram and on my YouTube channel. And I want to invite you to check out my website and to see what other services I offered. So in case you need any help and in case you need to hire me and to use any of my services, go to my website, go to the Services section and see what I can help you with and reach out to me. So this is it for this lecture and this is it for this course. I'm very happy that you finish the course and that you are moving forward. Don't forget to check out my other courses because I'm pretty sure all of them would help you to create that brand you are dreaming about. So stay tuned and let's meet and other courses. Bye bye.